1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 knx technical reference manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 knx...

122
1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch- pri On ® Pos: 2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Titelblätter/KNX/priOn/Titelblatt - priOn @ 9\mod_1269242014078_15.docx @ 52250 @ @ 1 Busch- pri On ® innovative and intuitive Improved control elements. For example, the new 8.9 cm (3.5”) TFT display as informative component of a flush-type combination is both stylish and efficient. Its menu can be individually adapted to every building and at all times provides an overview of the electrical consumers. From here the heating can be controlled, the lights dimmed or comprehensive scenes called up that trigger numerous preprogrammed actions. Meaningful symbols lead even the untrained user to his objective in just a few steps. The division of functions into individual areas such as light, heating or blinds, assists everyone to find his way around intuitively. Yet, this is not the end of possibilities for the Busch-pri On ® in classical building technology. The display can also be used for controlling music. The combination of pushbutton/rotary control element and display has a universal operating concept. The definition of a primary function makes its use particularly easy. The primary function appears when one approaches the display (a special proximity sensor is available) or when pressing the rotary control element. In principle, any switching, dimming, blinds, scene or sequence function that has been stored in the unit can be defined as primary function. It is only when the menu button is pressed that the display changes to the circuit menu. Up to 8 entries can be displayed via one symbol. By turning the pushbutton/rotary control element the user can bring the desired function into the foreground. An associated text below the focused symbol is shown (e.g. system settings, room control office, room control, living room, etc.). By activating the pushbutton/rotary control element the display changes to the respective list menu, which can consist of up to 15 different functions. The user can scroll through these functions by turning the pushbutton/rotary control element. The function is selected by pressing the button. === Ende der Liste für Textmarke Cover ===

Upload: lytram

Post on 07-Sep-2018

257 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

Pos: 2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Titelblätter/KNX/priOn/Titelblatt - priOn @ 9\mod_1269242014078_15.docx @ 52250 @ @ 1

Busch-priOn®

innovative and intuitive Improved control elements. For example, the new 8.9 cm (3.5”) TFT display as informative component of a flush-type combination is both stylish and efficient. Its menu can be individually adapted to every building and at all times provides an overview of the electrical consumers. From here the heating can be controlled, the lights dimmed or comprehensive scenes called up that trigger numerous preprogrammed actions. Meaningful symbols lead even the untrained user to his objective in just a few steps. The division of functions into individual areas such as light, heating or blinds, assists everyone to find his way around intuitively. Yet, this is not the end of possibilities for the Busch-priOn® in classical building technology. The display can also be used for controlling music.

The combination of pushbutton/rotary control element and display has a universal operating concept. The definition of a primary function makes its use particularly easy. The primary function appears when one approaches the display (a special proximity sensor is available) or when pressing the rotary control element. In principle, any switching, dimming, blinds, scene or sequence function that has been stored in the unit can be defined as primary function. It is only when the menu button is pressed that the display changes to the circuit menu. Up to 8 entries can be displayed via one symbol. By turning the pushbutton/rotary control element the user can bring the desired function into the foreground. An associated text below the focused symbol is shown (e.g. system settings, room control office, room control, living room, etc.). By activating the pushbutton/rotary control element the display changes to the respective list menu, which can consist of up to 15 different functions. The user can scroll through these functions by turning the pushbutton/rotary control element. The function is selected by pressing the button.

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Cover ===

Page 2: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

2 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Inhaltsverzeichnis (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 19\mod_1320649044386_15.docx @ 109653 @ @ 1

1 Safety instructions .................................................................................................................................................... 9 2 Dimensional drawings ............................................................................................................................................ 10 3 Frame-free variety .................................................................................................................................................. 11 4 Combinations as desired ....................................................................................................................................... 12 5 Not just any KNX control element .......................................................................................................................... 13 6 The right bus coupler ............................................................................................................................................. 15 7 Easy to mount ........................................................................................................................................................ 16 8 Room temperature controller operation ................................................................................................................. 17

8.1 Room thermostat with display ............................................................................................................... 17 8.1.1 Standard view ....................................................................................................................................... 17 8.1.2 Set values ............................................................................................................................................. 17 8.2 Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 18

9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]) .. 19 9.1 Busch-priOn 8.89 cm display 6344-xxx-101-500 .................................................................................. 19 9.1.1 Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 19 9.1.2 Operating functions ............................................................................................................................... 20 9.1.3 Info line ................................................................................................................................................. 21 9.1.4 Busch-priOn® top end strip with display 6351/08-825-500 ................................................................... 21 9.2 Combination with 3gang control element 6342-xxx-101-500 ................................................................ 22 9.2.1 Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 22 9.3 Combination with 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500 ...................................................... 23 9.3.1 Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 23 9.3.2 Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 24

10 Planner support for RTC ........................................................................................................................................ 25 10.1 Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 25 10.1.1 Operating mode switchover, 1 bit .......................................................................................................... 25 10.1.2 Operating mode switchover, 1 byte ....................................................................................................... 26 10.1.3 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................. 27 10.1.4 External temperature sensor ................................................................................................................. 27 10.1.5 Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ 28 10.2 Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 28 10.2.1 2-point controller ................................................................................................................................... 29 10.2.2 Continuous controller ............................................................................................................................ 29 10.2.3 PWM controller ..................................................................................................................................... 30 10.2.4 Fan coil ................................................................................................................................................. 30 10.2.5 Control parameter for PWM controller and continuous controller (Fan coil) .......................................... 30 10.2.6 Two-stage heating / cooling .................................................................................................................. 31 10.3 Set values ............................................................................................................................................. 31 10.3.1 Dependent setpoints ............................................................................................................................. 31 10.3.2 Individual setpoints................................................................................................................................ 32 10.3.3 Minimum distance ................................................................................................................................. 32 10.4 Fan coil, general ................................................................................................................................... 33 10.5 Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 34 10.5.1 Summer compensation ......................................................................................................................... 34 10.5.2 Winter compensation ............................................................................................................................ 35

11 Description of application ....................................................................................................................................... 36 11.1 Switching, rocker total ........................................................................................................................... 36 11.2 Switching, rocker left/right ..................................................................................................................... 36 11.3 Dimming, rocker total ............................................................................................................................ 36 11.4 Dimming, rocker left/right ...................................................................................................................... 37 11.5 Blind, rocker total .................................................................................................................................. 37

Page 3: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 3

11.6 Blind, rocker left/right ............................................................................................................................ 37 11.7 Value sender, rocker total ..................................................................................................................... 38 11.8 Value sender, rocker left/right ............................................................................................................... 38 11.9 Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right ............................................................................................... 39 11.10 Value dimming sensor, rocker total ....................................................................................................... 39 11.11 Light scene extension unit with memory function .................................................................................. 40 11.12 Step switch, rocker total ........................................................................................................................ 40 11.13 Step switch, rocker left/right .................................................................................................................. 41 11.14 Multiple operation, rocker left/right ........................................................................................................ 41 11.15 Short/long operation, rocker left/right .................................................................................................... 43 11.16 Setting RTC operation mode ................................................................................................................. 43 11.17 Media control, CD player ....................................................................................................................... 44 11.18 Media control, radio ............................................................................................................................... 45 11.19 Media control, video player ................................................................................................................... 46 11.20 Short-time timer ..................................................................................................................................... 46 11.21 Weekly timer ......................................................................................................................................... 47 11.22 Alarm clock ........................................................................................................................................... 48 11.23 Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 49 11.24 Title text ................................................................................................................................................ 49 11.25 Unit blockage ........................................................................................................................................ 50 11.26 RTC settings ......................................................................................................................................... 50 11.27 Sequence actuator settings ................................................................................................................... 50 11.28 Shutting actuator ................................................................................................................................... 51 11.29 Switch actuator application ................................................................................................................... 51 11.30 Movement detector ............................................................................................................................... 52 11.31 LED function ......................................................................................................................................... 54 11.32 Alarm function ....................................................................................................................................... 54 11.33 Light scene memory function ................................................................................................................ 54 11.34 Delay ..................................................................................................................................................... 55 11.35 Staircase lighting ................................................................................................................................... 56 11.36 Light scene actuator .............................................................................................................................. 57 11.37 Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 57 11.38 Preset .................................................................................................................................................... 58 11.39 Cyclic telegram ...................................................................................................................................... 58 11.40 Flashing ................................................................................................................................................ 59 11.41 Logic ..................................................................................................................................................... 59 11.42 Gate ...................................................................................................................................................... 60 11.43 Min/Max value transducer ..................................................................................................................... 61 11.44 Threshold value / hysteresis ................................................................................................................. 62 11.45 PWM inverter ........................................................................................................................................ 62 11.46 Priority ................................................................................................................................................... 63

12 Description of applications/parameters for room temperature control 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 [from update version 0.1.6.0 .................................................................................................................................. 64 12.1 Application "RTC" .................................................................................................................................. 64 12.1.1 General - Device function ...................................................................................................................... 64 12.1.2 General - Control function ..................................................................................................................... 64 12.1.3 General - Operating mode after reset ................................................................................................... 65 12.1.4 General - Additional functions ............................................................................................................... 65 12.1.5 General - Send cyclic "In operation" (min) ............................................................................................ 66 12.1.6 Heating control ...................................................................................................................................... 66 12.1.7 Heating control - Control value type ...................................................................................................... 66 12.1.8 Heating control - Heating type ............................................................................................................... 67

Page 4: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

4 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

12.1.9 Heating control - P-component (x 0.1°C) .............................................................................................. 67 12.1.10 Heating control - I-component (min.) ..................................................................................................... 68 12.1.11 Heating control - Extended settings ...................................................................................................... 68 12.1.12 Basic stage heating ............................................................................................................................... 68 12.1.13 Basic stage heating - Status object heating .......................................................................................... 68 12.1.14 Basic stage heating - Mode of the control value ................................................................................... 68 12.1.15 Basic stage heating - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ............................................................................................ 69 12.1.16 Basic stage heating - Control value difference for sending of heating control value ............................. 69 12.1.17 Basic stage heating - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ............................................................ 69 12.1.18 Basic stage heating - PWM cycle heating (min) .................................................................................... 70 12.1.19 Basic stage heating - Maximum control value (0 - 255) ........................................................................ 70 12.1.20 Basic stage heating - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255) ................................................. 70 12.1.21 Control of additional heating stage ........................................................................................................ 70 12.1.22 Control of additional heating stage - Control value type ........................................................................ 71 12.1.23 Control of additional heating stage - Additional heating type ................................................................ 72 12.1.24 Control of additional heating stage - P-component (x 0.1°C) ................................................................ 72 12.1.25 Control of additional heating stage - P-component (min) ...................................................................... 73 12.1.26 Control of additional heating stage - Temperature difference to basic stage (x 0.1°C) ......................... 73 12.1.27 Control of additional heating stage - Extended settings ........................................................................ 73 12.1.28 Additional heating stage ........................................................................................................................ 73 12.1.29 Additional heating stage - Mode of the control value............................................................................. 73 12.1.30 Additional heating stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ..................................................................................... 74 12.1.31 Additional heating stage - Control value difference for sending of heating control value ...................... 74 12.1.32 Additional heating stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ..................................................... 75 12.1.33 Additional heating stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255) ............................................ 75 12.1.34 Cooling control ...................................................................................................................................... 76 12.1.35 Cooling control - Control value type ...................................................................................................... 76 12.1.36 Cooling control - Cooling type ............................................................................................................... 77 12.1.37 Cooling control - P-component (x 0.1°C)............................................................................................... 77 12.1.38 Cooling control - I-component (min.) ..................................................................................................... 77 12.1.39 Cooling control - Extended settings ...................................................................................................... 78 12.1.40 Basic stage cooling ............................................................................................................................... 78 12.1.41 Basic stage cooling - Status object cooling ........................................................................................... 78 12.1.42 Basic stage cooling - Mode of the control value .................................................................................... 78 12.1.43 Basic stage cooling - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ............................................................................................ 79 12.1.44 Basic stage cooling - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ............................................................. 79 12.1.45 Basic stage cooling ............................................................................................................................... 80 12.1.46 Basic stage cooling - Maximum control value (0 - 255) ......................................................................... 80 12.1.47 Basic stage cooling - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255) .................................................. 80 12.1.48 Control of additional cooling stage ........................................................................................................ 81 12.1.49 Control of additional cooling stage - Cooling type ................................................................................. 82 12.1.50 Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (x 0.1°C) ................................................................. 82 12.1.51 Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (min) ....................................................................... 82 12.1.52 Control of additional cooling stage - Extended settings ......................................................................... 83 12.1.53 Additional cooling stage ........................................................................................................................ 83 12.1.54 Additional cooling stage - Mode of the control value ............................................................................. 83 12.1.55 Additional cooling stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ..................................................................................... 83 12.1.56 Additional cooling stage - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value ....................... 84 12.1.57 Additional cooling stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ...................................................... 84 12.1.58 Additional cooling stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255) .................................................................. 84 12.1.59 Additional cooling stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255) ............................................. 85 12.1.60 Settings of basic load ............................................................................................................................ 85

Page 5: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 5

12.1.61 Settings of basic load - Minimum control value for basic load > 0 ......................................................... 85 12.1.62 Combined heating and cooling modes .................................................................................................. 85 12.1.63 Combined heating and cooling modes - Switchover of heating/cooling ................................................ 86 12.1.64 Combined heating and cooling modes - Operating mode after reset .................................................... 86 12.1.65 Combined heating and cooling modes - Heating/cooling control value output ...................................... 86 12.1.66 Combined heating and cooling modes - Additional heating/cooling stage control value output ............ 87 12.1.67 Setpoint settings .................................................................................................................................... 87 12.1.68 Setpoint settings - Setpoint for heating comfort = setpoint for cooling comfort ...................................... 87 12.1.69 Setpoint settings - Hysteresis for switchover heating/cooling (x 0.1°C)................................................. 88 12.1.70 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating and cooling comfort (°C) ...................................... 88 12.1.71 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating comfort (°C) ......................................................... 88 12.1.72 Setpoint settings - Reduction for standby heating (°C).......................................................................... 88 12.1.73 Setpoint settings - Reduction for ECO heating (°C) .............................................................................. 89 12.1.74 Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for frost protection (°C) ......................................................... 89 12.1.75 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for cooling comfort (°C) ......................................................... 89 12.1.76 Setpoint settings - Increase for standby cooling (°C) ............................................................................ 89 12.1.77 Setpoint settings - Increase for ECO cooling (°C) ................................................................................. 90 12.1.78 Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for heat protection (°C) ......................................................... 90 12.1.79 Setpoint settings - Display indicates ...................................................................................................... 90 12.1.80 Setpoint settings - Display indicates ...................................................................................................... 90 12.1.81 Setpoint settings - Send current setpoint .............................................................................................. 91 12.1.82 Setpoint settings - Cyclic sending of the current set-point temperature (min) ....................................... 91 12.1.83 Setpoint adjustment .............................................................................................................................. 91 12.1.84 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during heating mode (0 - 15°C) ............................ 91 12.1.85 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during heating mode (0 - 15°C) ........................... 91 12.1.86 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during cooling mode (0 - 15°C) ............................. 92 12.1.87 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during cooling mode (0 - 15°C) ........................... 92 12.1.88 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting of the manual adjustment for receipt of a basic setpoint .................... 92 12.1.89 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment for change of operating mode ....................... 93 12.1.90 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment via object ....................................................... 93 12.1.91 Setpoint adjustment - Permanent storage of on-site operation ............................................................. 93 12.1.92 Temperature reading - Inputs of temperature reading ........................................................................... 93 12.1.93 Temperature reading - Inputs of weighted temperature reading ........................................................... 94 12.1.94 Temperature reading - Weighting of internal measurement (0 to 100%) ............................................... 94 12.1.95 Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement (0 to 100%) .............................................. 94 12.1.96 Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement 2 (0 to 100%) ........................................... 94 12.1.97 Temperature reading - Cyclic sending of the actual temperature (min) ................................................. 95 12.1.98 Temperature reading - Difference of value for sending the actual temperature (x 0.1°C) ..................... 95 12.1.99 Temperature reading - Adjustment value for internal temperature measurement (x 0.1°C) .................. 95 12.1.100 Temperature reading - Monitoring time for temperature reading (0 = no monitoring) (min) ................... 95 12.1.101 Temperature reading — Operating mode for fault................................................................................. 96 12.1.102 Temperature reading - Control value for fault (0 - 255) ......................................................................... 96 12.1.103 Alarm functions ..................................................................................................................................... 96 12.1.104 Alarm functions - Condensate water alarm ........................................................................................... 96 12.1.105 Alarm functions — Dew point alarm ...................................................................................................... 97 12.1.106 Alarm functions - Frost alarm temperature for HVAC and RHCC status (°C) ........................................ 97 12.1.107 Alarm functions - Heat alarm temperature for RHCC status (°C) .......................................................... 97 12.1.108 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels ...................................................................................................... 97 12.1.109 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels Number of fan speed levels ......................................................... 97 12.1.110 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Format of the level output .......................................................... 98 12.1.111 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level output ............................................................................... 98 12.1.112 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Lowest manually adjustable level ............................................... 98

Page 6: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

6 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

12.1.113 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level status evaluation .............................................................. 99 12.1.114 Fan coil settings heating ....................................................................................................................... 99 12.1.115 Fan coil settings for heating - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) heating ....................... 99 12.1.116 Fan coil settings for heating - Fan speed level limit heating for eco mode ............................................ 99 12.1.117 Fan coil settings for heating - Maximum speed level heating for eco mode ........................................ 100 12.1.118 Fan coil settings for cooling ................................................................................................................. 100 12.1.119 Fan coil settings for cooling - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) cooling ...................... 100 12.1.120 Fan coil settings for cooling - Fan speed level limit cooling for eco mode ........................................... 100 12.1.121 Fan coil settings for cooling - Maximum fan speed level cooling for eco mode ................................... 100 12.1.122 Summer compensation ....................................................................................................................... 101 12.1.123 Summer compensation - Summer compensation ............................................................................... 101 12.1.124 Summer compensation - (Lower) Starting temperature for summer compensation (°C) ..................... 102 12.1.125 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the entry into

summer compensation (x 0.1°C) ......................................................................................................... 102 12.1.126 Summer compensation - (Upper) exit temperature for summer compensation (°C) ........................... 102 12.1.127 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the exit from

summer compensation (x 0.1°C) ......................................................................................................... 103 12.2 Communication objects - RTC ............................................................................................................ 104 12.2.1 Heating control value .......................................................................................................................... 104 12.2.2 Additional heating stage ...................................................................................................................... 104 12.2.3 Cooling control value ........................................................................................................................... 104 12.2.4 Additional cooling stage ...................................................................................................................... 105 12.2.5 Control On/Off ..................................................................................................................................... 105 12.2.6 Actual temperature .............................................................................................................................. 106 12.2.7 External actual temperature ................................................................................................................ 106 12.2.8 External actual temperature 2 ............................................................................................................. 106 12.2.9 Fault, actual temperature .................................................................................................................... 107 12.2.10 Local actual temperature ..................................................................................................................... 107 12.2.11 Current setpoint .................................................................................................................................. 108 12.2.12 Operating mode .................................................................................................................................. 108 12.2.13 Superimposed operating mode ........................................................................................................... 109 12.2.14 Window contact ................................................................................................................................... 109 12.2.15 Presence detector ............................................................................................................................... 110 12.2.16 Heating status ..................................................................................................................................... 110 12.2.17 Cooling status ..................................................................................................................................... 110 12.2.18 Basic load ........................................................................................................................................... 111 12.2.19 Switchover heating/cooling ................................................................................................................. 111 12.2.20 Fan coil manual ................................................................................................................................... 112 12.2.21 Fan coil step ........................................................................................................................................ 112 12.2.22 Fan coil step status ............................................................................................................................. 113 12.2.23 Fan speed level 1 ................................................................................................................................ 113 12.2.24 Fan speed level 2 ................................................................................................................................ 113 12.2.25 Fan speed level 3 ................................................................................................................................ 113 12.2.26 Fan speed level 4 ................................................................................................................................ 113 12.2.27 Fan speed level 5 ................................................................................................................................ 114 12.2.28 Basic setpoint ...................................................................................................................................... 114 12.2.29 Resetting manual setpoints ................................................................................................................. 114 12.2.30 Dew point alarm .................................................................................................................................. 114 12.2.31 Condensate water alarm ..................................................................................................................... 115 12.2.32 Outside temperature for summer compensation ................................................................................. 115 12.2.33 Summer compensation active ............................................................................................................. 116 12.2.34 Setpoint reached ................................................................................................................................. 116

Page 7: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 7

12.2.35 Fahrenheit ........................................................................................................................................... 116 12.2.36 Display backlighting ............................................................................................................................ 117 12.2.37 On/Off request..................................................................................................................................... 117 12.2.38 Setpoint display ................................................................................................................................... 117 12.2.39 Request setpoint ................................................................................................................................. 117 12.2.40 Confirm setpoint .................................................................................................................................. 117 12.2.41 Heating/cooling request ...................................................................................................................... 118 12.2.42 Request fan speed level manual ......................................................................................................... 118 12.2.43 Request fan speed level ...................................................................................................................... 118 12.2.44 Confirm fan speed level ...................................................................................................................... 118 12.2.45 Controller status RHCC ....................................................................................................................... 119 12.2.46 Controller status HVAC ....................................................................................................................... 119 12.2.47 Commissioned .................................................................................................................................... 119

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke TOC ===

Page 8: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

8 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 9: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 9

Pos: 7.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/S - TSicherheitshinweise @ 9\mod_1269243781484_15.docx @ 52309 @ 1 @ 1

1 Safety instructions Pos: 7.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 7.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Sicherheitshinweise/Sicherheitshinweise @ 9\mod_1269245364203_15.docx @ 52365 @ @ 1

Work on the 230 V power supply system must only be performed by specialist staff. Disconnect the mains power supply prior to mounting and/or disassembly! Failure to observe the installation and operating instructions may result in fire or other hazards.

Pos: 7.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Spaltenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898761421_0.docx @ 52154 @ @ 1

Pos: 7.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Sicherheitshinweise/Haftungsausschluss @ 16\mod_1292413036321_15.docx @ 97864 @ @ 1

Disclaimer The content of this printed material has been checked for compliance with hardware and software. However, no liability can be assumed for any deviations that may still occur. Any necessary corrections will be implemented in future versions of this manual. Please advise us of any suggestions concerning the manual's improvement you may have.

Pos: 7.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 10: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

10 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 9.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/M - OMaßzeichnungen @ 9\mod_1269243888140_15.docx @ 52313 @ 1 @ 1

2 Dimensional drawings Pos: 9.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 9.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Maßzeichnungen/Variante - ABB/Maßzeichnungen_Best_Nr - ABB @ 15\mod_1289220462033_15.docx @ 96904 @ @ 1

Flush-type 8,9 cm (3,5") display with control element, Busch-priOn®

Flush-type control element, Busch-priOn® 6340-xxx-101-500

Flush-type movement detector Busch-priOn® 6345-xxx-101-500

107

71

31

Support frame for Busch-priOn® 6346/12-101-500

Flush-type rotary control element, 6341-xxx-101-500

Pos: 9.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 10 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 11: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 11

Pos: 11.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/P - RRahmenlose Vielfalt @ 9\mod_1269243889687_15.docx @ 52318 @ 1 @ 1

3 Frame-free variety Pos: 11.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Rahmenlose Vielfalt/Rahmenlose Vielfalt @ 9\mod_1269245480843_15.docx @ 52373 @ @ 1

It is not merely individuality which characterises Busch-priOn® during programming of the individual buttons: Also the assembly arrangement of the Busch-priOn® combinations are highly flexible. For Busch-priOn is not bound to frames -- instead, up to 3 individual elements are fixed to a support frame and, at the end, provided with end strips above and below. There are four choices of finish for the control elements: studio white, glass white, glass black and stainless steel. Most of the end strips are also available in these colour versions. For the display (style sheets), there are three choices: black, blue and silver.

Pos: 12 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Modular design End strips These not only have a beautiful shape -- they optionally contain a temperature sensor for room temperature control, an infrared interface for the remote control and a proximity sensor for activating the display or LED of the control elements when somebody approaches. This IR / proximity sensor version is only available in glass black and not in the other colours. Additional information about controlling the room temperature with Busch-priOn® is contained in the brochure on heating, ventilation and air conditioning.

Page 12: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

12 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 13.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/G - LKombinationen nach Wunsch @ 9\mod_1269243898187_15.docx @ 52323 @ 1 @ 1

4 Combinations as desired Pos: 13.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kombinationen nach Wunsch/Variante - ABBKombinationen nach Wunsch_Best_Nr - ABB @ 41\mod_1422287700530_15.docx @ 314949 @ @ 1

The control elements and end strips can be freely combined in their colours and functions for Busch-priOn. Up to 3gang combinations are possible, whereby a single bus coupler will suffice. Article number Support frame

1gang 2gang 3gang Top end strip IR / proximity sensor 6350-825-101-500 ● ● ● Top end strip with display, IR / proximity sensor 6351-825-101-500 ● ● ● Top end strip standard 6348-101-500 ● ● ● Top end strip with display, IR / proximity sensor 6351/08-825-500 ● ● ● 1gang control element 6340-101-500 ● ● ● 3gang control element 6342-101-500 ● ● ● 1gang rotary control element 6341-101-500 ● ● ● Movement detector 6345-101-500 ● ● ● 8.9 cm display including control element 6344-101-500 - ● ● Bottom end strip, temperature 6352-101-500 ● ● ● Bottom end strip standard 6349-101-500 ● ● ● Bus coupler 6120/12-500 ● - - Power bus coupler and power adaptor, MDRC 6120/13-500 + 6358-500 ● ● ● Network coupler 6920/12 ● - - Power mains coupler 6920/13 ● ● ● Flush-mounted switch actuator 6354-500 - ● ● Flush-mounted dimming actuator, 1gang 6355-500 - ● ● Flush-mounted blind / switch actuator 6356-500 - ● ● Flush-mounted blind / switch actuator 6920/40 ● ● -

Pos: 15.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/G - LKein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement @ 9\mod_1269243899796_15.docx @ 52328 @ 1 @ 1

Pos: 11 /Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.doc @ 52148 @

Page 13: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 13

5 Not just any KNX control element Pos: 15.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Text @ 9\mod_1269426042218_15.docx @ 52740 @ @ 1

Each of the buttons of the Busch-priOn® can be programmed individually, as is usually the case with KNX. The applications range from switching, dimming and blinds on through to scenes. Logic functions are also possible. The use of the display makes additional functions available. Weekly timers, messages and multimedia applications can be integrated here, for example. Also additional applications can be implemented with the assigning of internal group addresses. The user menu can be configured in 19 languages. Pos: 15.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Tabelle - Applikationen @ 15\mod_1289221025466_15.docx @ 96936 @ @ 1

Applications Application Control element Rotary control

element 8.9 cm (3,5") TFT

display with control element

Movement detector

Page number

Switching, rocker total ● - - - Page 36 Switching, rocker left/right ● - ● - Page 36 Dimming, rocker total ● - - - Page 36 Dimming, rocker left/right ● ● ● - Page 37 Blind, rocker total ● - - - Page 37 Blind, rocker left/right ● ● ● - Page 37 Value sender, rocker total ● - - - Page 38 Value sender, rocker left/right ● ● ● - Page 38 Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right ● - - - Page 39 Value dimming sensor, rocker total ● - ● - Page 39 Light scene extension unit with memory function

● - ● - Page 40

Level switch, rocker total ● - - - Page 40 Level switch, rocker left/right ● - - - Page 41 Multiple actuation, rocker left/right ● - - - Page 41 Short/long operation, rocker left/right ● - - - Page 43 Setting RTC operation mode ● - ● - Page 43 Media control, CD player - - ● - Page 44 Media control, radio - - ● - Page 45 Media control, video player - - ● - Page 46 Short-time timer - - ● - Page 46 Weekly timer - - ● - Page 47 Alarm clock - - ● - Page 48 Messages - - ● - Page 49 Title text - - ● - Page 49 Unit blockage - - ● - Page 50 RTC settings - - ●1 - Page 50 Sequence actuator settings - - ● - Page 50 Venetian blind application ● ● ●2 - Page 51 Switch actuator application ● ● ● - Page 51 Movement detector - - - ● Page 52 LED functionality ● ● ● - Page 54 Alarm function ● ● - - Page 54 Storage function Light scenes ● ● ● - Page 54

1 Only in connection with a bottom end strip "temperature sensor" or another external sensor. Busch- priOn® has 1 internal room thermostat. 2 Only in connection with flush-type blind / 2-gang actuator 6356.

Pos: 15.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 14: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

14 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 15.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Tabelle - Allg. Funktionen @ 15\mod_1289904254518_15.docx @ 97280 @ @ 1

General functions Function Large-area control

element Rotary control

element 8.9 cm (3,5") TFT

display with control element

Movement detector

Page number

Delay ● ● ● ● Page 55 Staircase lighting ● ● ● ● Page 56 Light scene actuator settings ● ● ● ● Page 57 Sequence ● ● ● ● Page 57 Preset ● ● ● ● Page 58 Cyclic telegram ● ● ● ● Page 58 Flahing ● ● ● ● Page 59 Logic ● ● ● ● Page 59 Gate ● ● ● ● Page 60 Min/Max value transducer ● ● ● ● Page 61 Threshold value / hysteresis ● ● ● ● Page 62 PWM inverter ● ● ● ● Page 62 Priority ● ● ● ● Page 62

Pos: 15.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-BedienelementKein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Abbildung 1/2fach @ 41\mod_1422276842090_15.docx @ 314917 @ @ 1

Busch-priOn® Rotary control element glass black

Busch-priOn® 3gang control element, glass black

Busch-priOn® 1gang control element, glass black

Busch-priOn® 2gang combination, glass black

Busch-priOn® Top end strip + 3gang control element, glass black

Busch-priOn® Top end strip Rotary control element glass black

Busch-priOn® Watchdog 180 flush-mounted, glass black

Busch-priOn® is ideally combinable with the carat® switch range. These switches distinguish themselves through their uniformly designed surfaces.

Pos: 17.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FDer richtige Ankoppler @ 9\mod_1269243900921_15.docx @ 52333 @ 1 @ 1

Page 15: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 15

6 The right bus coupler Pos: 17.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 17.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Der richtige Ankoppler/Variante - ABB/Der richtige Ankoppler - Tabelle+Text_Best_Nr - ABB @ 16\mod_1291294382201_15.docx @ 97635 @ @ 1

Maximum number of Busch-priOn® devices per TP line Number of display combinations per line

Total number of combinations 1

Total number of TP-Power bus couplers 6120/13 per line

0 0 + 60 60 1 1 + 59 60 2 2 + 58 60 3 3 + 57 60 4 4 + 56 60 5 5 + 55 60 6 6 + 54 60 7 7 + 53 60 8 8 + 52 60 9 9 + 51 60

10 10 + 45 55 11 11 + 37 48 12 12 + 30 42 13 13 + 22 35 14 14 + 15 29 15 15 + 7 22 16 16 + 0 16

1 Composed of display combinations plus 1- to 3-gang combinations without display with end strips

Only one bus coupler is mounted behind every Busch-priOn® combination. One standard bus coupler is adequate for one 1-gang support frame. With the use of the 2-gang carrier frame the more powerful power bus coupler must be used. The twisted pair version requires an external power pack for this purpose. The table to the left describes the corresponding device combinations. Pos: 17.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 17.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Der richtige Ankoppler/Variante - ABB-STOTZ/Der richtige Ankoppler - Abbildung - ABB + ABB-STOTZ @ 16\mod_1291294546873_15.docx @ 97651 @ @ 1

Standard bus coupler, TP STN1 STN2 STN32

Power coupler, TP Power supply KNX

STN1 STN2

STN64

24 V DC power supply

For the number of device combinations see the table above

Pos: 18 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 16: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

16 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 19.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FEinfache Montage @ 9\mod_1269243901843_15.docx @ 52338 @ 1 @ 1

7 Easy to mount Pos: 19.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Einfache Montage/Einfache Montage - Text @ 10\mod_1272614580478_15.docx @ 53803 @ @ 1

The carrier frame serves to hold and make contact with the individual control elements, the 8.9 cm (3,5”) TFT display, the end strips and the flush-type bus coupler. The position of the control elements can be selected freely for multiple combinations. A special strip must be mounted on top as well as below. Its material can be different to that of the module. The support frame is mounted by screwing it to the flush-type bus coupler and, for multiple combinations, also to the wall. Thanks to the anti-fingerprint surface, the stainless steel Busch-priOn® is easy to keep clean and maintains its sophisticated surface finish even when it is in use. Glass surfaces and end strips match the carat® series. Pos: 19.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Einfache Montage/Einfache Montage - Abbildung 3fach @ 9\mod_1269245658421_15.docx @ 52398 @ @ 1

Busch-priOn® Glass black

Busch-priOn® Studio white

Busch-priOn® Stainless steel

Busch-priOn® Glass white

Pos: 20 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 17: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 17

Pos: 21.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Überschriften (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/1. Ebene/A - F/Bedienung Raumtemperaturregler @ 41\mod_1422288448107_15.docx @ 314997 @ 1 @ 1

8 Room temperature controller operation Pos: 21.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Raumtemperaturregler-Display @ 13\mod_1286269387786_15.docx @ 91504 @ 2 @ 1

8.1 Room thermostat with display Pos: 21.3 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/3. Ebene/S - TStandardansicht @ 13\mod_1286269449786_15.docx @ 91512 @ 3 @ 1

8.1.1 Standard view Pos: 21.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 21.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/Standardansicht @ 13\mod_1286269136131_15.docx @ 91487 @ @ 1

Operating state Operating mode

Actual or setpoint temperature

The display of the room thermostat shows either the current room temperature or the setpoint for the temperature, depending on the parameterization. The current operating state is shown in the left area of the display and the current operating mode in the right area. Pos: 21.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 21.7 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/3. Ebene/S - TSollwerte @ 13\mod_1286269492130_15.docx @ 91520 @ 3 @ 1

8.1.2 Set values Pos: 21.8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 21.9 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1286269283224_15.docx @ 91495 @ @ 1

Heating setpoint Cooling setpoint

Temperature - Temperature + Next setpoint Previous setpoint Comfort/Standby FanCoil-Steps On/Off Short press Long press

In the setting level, which is accessed by pressing the additional key once, the setpoints for heating and/or cooling can be adjusted. The corresponding setpoints are located to the right of each respective symbol for heating or cooling. The value brightly highlighted can be changed. The adjustment is made with the upper rocker of the control element. A short press of the left side lowers the setpoint, a short press of the right side raises the setpoint. With a long press of the button the selection jumps to the next setpoint. This one can now also be adjusted with a short press of the button. After an adjustable time, the display returns to the standard view. Pos: 21.10 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 21.11 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 18: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

18 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 21.12 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Betriebsarten @ 13\mod_1286276050737_15.docx @ 91535 @ 2 @ 1

8.2 Operating modes Pos: 21.13 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1 Pos: 21.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/ArchivBetriebsarten_zwei (2015-01-29 08:33:41) @ 13\mod_1286273939022_15.docx @ 91528 @ @ 1

Standby: Standby mode lowers the temperature below the value of comfort mode. This saves energy and does not cool down the room even during an extended absence.

Comfort: Comfort mode regulates the temperature to suit the occupants while present. It can be called up time-controlled or via a telegram.

Dew point: If an appropriate telegram is received from a dew point sensor, the room thermostat will display the corresponding symbol and cease cooling and merely protect against the heat.

Alarm: The alarm can be freely parameterized. For example, it can occur when an external temperature sensor no longer sends values.

On/Off: The room thermostat can be turned on and off. When turned off, this icon is shown in the display. The divice operates in frost protection mode.

Night setback: The temperature can be reduced during the night. This saves energy and makes the night's rest comfortable. The heating starts again automatically the next morning to reach a comfortable temperature for rising.

Frost protection: If parameterized, frost protection will ensure that the temperature does not drop below the desired value. It is the lowest setpoint.

Heat protection: If parameterized, heat protection will ensure that the temperature does not exceed the desired value. It is the highest setpoint.

Condensate: The operation of a fan coil may cause condensate water, which is collected in a container. If the fan coil sends out a telegram when the container is full, the symbol for condensate mode is displayed. The room thermostat immediately switches into heat protection mode.

Pos: 21.15 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1

Pos: 22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 19: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 19

Pos: 23.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Raumtemperaturregler/Bedienung Raumtemperaturregler (nur 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 [ab 0.1.6.0]) -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422553842483_15.docx @ 331952 @ 12333323233 @ 1

9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0])

9.1 Busch-priOn 8.89 cm display 6344-xxx-101-500

On the 8.89 cm display the current RTC will be replaced by the "Unified RTC". The update to the new "Unified RTC" is carried out via the SD card slot of the device.

Note The RTC functions are not compatible, which means that after the successful update the user must re-parameterize and re-commission the RTC.

9.1.1 Operating process

The RTC is operated by calling up the desired controller from the list menu. The function is selected with the aid of the rotary control element. Confirm by pressing the rotary control element.

Page 20: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

20 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

9.1.2 Operating functions

The following functions are available to the user:

Display Function

Setpoint adjustment To change the setpoint temperature, select it via the rotary control element and press it

to confirm the change. The setpoint is adjusted by turning the rotary control element. The adjustment is taken over by pressing the rotary control element. The respective active mode (heating or cooling) is displayed by means of the corresponding colour of blue or orange. If the adjustment is carried out within the parameterized hysteresis heat/cooling, the background is illuminated in white. If the threshold value is exceeded or drops below the required value, this is displayed in the setpoint display via the colour orange (heating) or blue (cooling).

ECO mode If the ECO mode is selected, this can be activated by pressing on the rotary control element. The display then changes to the ECO icon: - The other functions of the RTC are blocked. - Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.

The screen switches back to the overall view.

OFF Selection of function and confirmation by pressing the rotary control element. The display then changes to the OFF icon:

Fan coil Selection of the fan coil function and confirmation by pressing the rotary control element. - The fan speed level is adjusted manually by turning the rotary control element. The

adjustment is taken over by pressing the rotary control element.

Switchover Heating/cooling

Selection of heating/cooling switchover. Optional switching between heating function and cooling function is carried out by toggling the rotary control element. The respective function is displayed via the corresponding icon.

Alarm functions The alarm functions are indicated in grey in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation is blocked. The blockage is indicated via the blockage symbol at the top left in the window. It can be deactivated only by cancelling the alarm.

Frost/heat protection

Condensation

Dew point

Comfort mode

Standby mode

ECO mode

21,0 °C

1

4

Page 21: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 21

9.1.3 Info line

The status of the internal controller is displayed at the left in the info line. The active operating mode, e.g. ECO mode, is displayed via the icon in green. The heating or cooling status is shown via the respective colour blue or orange. 9.1.4 Busch-priOn® top end strip with display 6351/08-825-500

The end strip has been supplemented with the operation of the 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500 for room temperature controller operation. The 3gang control element and the 1gang rotary control element are selected via the parameter setting. Starting from the 2gang support frame the 1gang rotary control element can be combined with other models of the Busch-priOn product range. When using the 1gang support frame in connection with the rotary control element, this combination only has one pure room temperature controller with rotary control and display. The bottom end strip with temperature sensor is to be used for the local measurement of the temperature.

Page 22: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

22 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

9.2 Combination with 3gang control element 6342-xxx-101-500

9.2.1 Operating process

Operation is carried out by pressing the additional key on the end strip. The device changes to the RTC adjustment level. This change is indicated via an inverse display of the setpoint temperature (white with black numbers). The jump-back to the first operating level occurs after a waiting period of 3 seconds or with a renewed press of the additional key. The following functions are available to the user:

Display Function

Setpoint adjustment The setpoint adjustment is made via the topmost rocker left/right.

ECO mode If the ECO mode is selected, this can be activated by pressing on the rotary control element. The display then changes to the ECO icon: - The other functions of the RTC are blocked. - Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.

The screen switches back to the overall view.

OFF The device is switched off by pressing the centre left rocker half. The function is displayed in the centre of the display via the corresponding icon. - It can only be deactivated with a renewed press of the left rocker.

Fan coil The fan coil is operated via the bottom left rocker half. The active fan speed level is displayed in the centre of the display. The adjustment is performed with a renewed press of the rocker until the desired manual fan speed level is selected. It is displayed in the centre of the display and consists of the fan icon and the active fan speed level.

Switchover heating/cooling

The user can switch between heating and cooling via the bottom right rocker (if parameterized).

Alarm functions The alarm functions are indicated in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation in the RTC operating level is blocked. It can be deactivated only by cancelling the alarm.

Frost/heat protection

Condensation

Dew point

Comfort mode

Standby mode

ECO mode

21,0 °C

1

4

Page 23: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 23

9.3 Combination with 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500

9.3.1 Operating process

The RTC is operated by calling up the desired controller from the list menu. The function is selected with the aid of the rotary control element. Confirm by pressing the rotary control element. The following functions are available to the user:

Display Function

Setpoint adjustment The current setpoint is indicated directly. The setpoint is adjusted by turning the rotary

control element. The adjustment is taken over after a waiting period. The active mode (heating or cooling) is displayed via the corresponding icon on the left next to the setpoint, and the respective function is simultaneously displayed via the coloured backlighting of the rotary control element. If the adjustment is carried out within the parameterized hysteresis heat/cooling, the background is illuminated in white. If the threshold value is exceeded or drops below the required value, this is displayed on the rotary control element via the colour orange (heating) or blue (cooling).

ECO mode The ECO mode is activated by pressing the rotary control element. The display then changes to the ECO icon: - The other functions of the RTC are blocked. - Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.

The screen switches back to the overall view. The rotary control element is backlit in green.

OFF The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the desired OFF function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon. The OFF function is activated with a press. The display then changes to the OFF icon: - The other functions of the RTC are blocked. - The controller is switched on with a renewed press. The screen switches back to the

overall view. - The rotary control element is backlit in white.

Fan coil The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the desired fan coil function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon. The fan coil function is activated with a press. The active fan speed level is displayed in the centre of the display. The adjustment is performed by turning the rotary control element until the desired manual fan speed level is selected. It is displayed in the centre of the display and consists of the fan icon and the active fan speed level: - Confirm with a renewed press or after waiting period. - The rotary control element is backlit in white.

Switchover heating/cooling

The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the desired heating/cooling function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon. Optional switching between heating function and cooling function is carried out by toggling the rotary control element. The respective function is displayed via the corresponding icon. - The rotary control element is backlit in white.

21,0 °C

1

4

Page 24: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

24 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Alarm functions The alarm functions are indicated in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation is blocked. It can be deactivated only by cancelling the alarm.

Frost/heat protection

Condensation

Dew point

Comfort mode

Standby mode

ECO mode

9.3.2 Operating modes

Comfort: Comfort mode regulates the temperature to suit the occupants while present. It can be called up time-controlled or via a telegram.

Standby: Standby mode lowers the temperature during presence below the level of comfort mode. This saves energy. And the room does not cool down during an extended absence.

Dew point: If an appropriate telegram is received from a dew point sensor, the room temperature controller will display the corresponding icon and cease cooling and merely protect against the heat.

Alarm: The alarm can be freely parameterized. For example, it can occur when an external temperature sensor no longer sends values.

On/Off: The room temperature controller can be switched on and off. This icon is displayed if the control is switched off. The device operates in frost protection mode.

Frost protection: If parameterized, frost protection will ensure that the temperature does not drop below the desired value. It is the lowest setpoint.

Heat protection: If parameterized, heat protection will ensure that the temperature does not exceed the desired value. It is the highest setpoint.

Condensate: The operation of a fan coil may cause condensate, which is collected in a container. If the fan coil sends out a telegram when the container is full, the icon for condensate mode is displayed. The room temperature controller switches automatically into heat protection mode.

ECO: ECO mode lowers the temperature to the programmed setting. This saves energy. And the room does not cool down during an extended absence.

Pos: 24 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 25: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 25

Pos: 25.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/P - RPlanerunterstützung RTR @ 13\mod_1286265494848_15.docx @ 91464 @ 1 @ 1

10 Planner support for RTC Pos: 25.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsarten_priON -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422517959532_15.docx @ 331048 @ 2 @ 1

10.1 Operating modes

The room temperature controller has four operating modes: • Frost protection mode (for heating): The room temperature control is inactive; heating is only carried out when the

temperature in the room drops to the point where the heating system could sustain damage through freezing. Heat protection mode (for cooling): The room temperature control is inactive; cooling is only carried out when the temperature has risen to the point where the heat in the room becomes unbearable.

• Comfort mode (for heating and cooling): The setpoint for the room temperature is set to a value that makes the temperature of the room comfortable during "normal use".

6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: Comfort mode is always active during manual operation (primary function). • Standby mode (for heating): The room temperature is reduced to the point where heating costs are saved (e.g. during

temporary absence), but can be quickly raised to comfort temperature again. Standby mode (for cooling): The room temperature is only raised to the point where energy costs are saved (e.g. during temporary absence), but can be quickly increased to comfort temperature again.

6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: Standby mode cannot be set on the device. It is can only be activated via the KNX bus. Indicated in the display via the

icon. • Night mode (for heating and cooling): Rooms are not used for longer periods during the night hours; the room

temperature is set to a comfortable night-time value and can be quickly raised again to the comfort setpoint in the morning.

6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: Night mode has been replaced by ECO mode. This can also be activated locally. Indicated in the display via the icon. A switchover between these operating modes can take place either by means of a switching telegram (parameter "Operating mode switchover": "1 bit (3x)") or with 1-byte value telegrams (parameter "Operating mode switchover": "1 byte (2x)"). Pos: 25.3 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsartenumschaltung 1 Bit_priOn -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422520031724_15.docx @ 331100 @ 3 @ 1

10.1.1 Operating mode switchover, 1 bit

Frost/heat protection has the highest priority; i.e., switchover to a different mode cannot take place in this case. The frost/heat protection must first be deactivated; by closing an open window, for example. Night mode has the next highest priority, followed by comfort mode. If none of these three operating modes are active, the room temperature controller is in standby mode. 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: The 1-bit operating mode switchover is not available for this!

Page 26: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

26 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 25.4 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsartenumschaltung 1 Byte @ 13\mod_1284559643038_15.docx @ 89981 @ 3 @ 1

10.1.2 Operating mode switchover, 1 byte

Two 1-byte communication objects are made available with operation mode switchover via 1 byte. The two 1-byte communication objects have different behaviours for receipt of telegram. One object evaluates received telegrams as "normal". This means, for example, if a comfort telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to comfort mode. If a night telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to night mode. This object is controlled, for example, by time switches. The second object ("Operating mode switchover OMO") can "overwrite" the first. This means, for example, if a frost/heat protection telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to frost or heat protection mode. If frost or heat protection is reset after receipt of a new telegram, the room thermostat activates the mode that is pending on the "normal" object. As a result, it is capable of memorising operating modes. This object is controlled, for example, by binary inputs that record information from window contacts. The following conditions apply for both 1-byte communication objects: 0 = Auto (only for "Operating mode switchover OMO“) 1 = Comfort 2 = Standby 3 = Night 4 = Frost/Heat protection 5 – 255 = not allowed Pos: 25.5 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 27: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 27

Pos: 25.6 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Überwachung Temperaturmessung @ 13\mod_1284635867620_15.docx @ 90018 @ 3 @ 1

10.1.3 Monitoring

The "Temperature measurement monitoring" parameter specifies whether the external temperature sensor and the outside temperature are to be monitored. This means that the room thermostat has to receive at least one telegram with the current temperature on the associated communication object within an adjustable time ("Monitoring time of external temperature" and "Monitoring time of outside temperature"). If no telegram is received during monitoring time, the room thermostat assumes that the measuring sensor for the outside temperature or external temperature is defective or no longer connected to the bus. The room thermostat will then terminate its control and send a predefined control value ("Control value during temperature measurement error") so that the room to be controlled does not overheat or cool down. This control value is sent out until the room thermostat again receives a temperature telegram via the bus and reactivates the control. Pos: 25.7 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Externe Temperaturerfassung @ 13\mod_1284635472980_15.docx @ 90010 @ 3 @ 1

10.1.4 External temperature sensor

In open-plan offices it can be difficult to control the temperature with only a single thermostat. That is why it would be advantageous to divide the room into zones with an additional room thermostat. To integrate the temperature value of the additional temperature sensor into the temperature control, the parameter "Room temperature measurement" must be set on "Internal and external". The the temperature measured inside and outside can then be additionally weighted. The setting for weighting depend on the local circumstances. If the room thermostat and the additional measuring sensor are positioned equal distances from the heater, in the case of panel heaters, a 50% / 50% setting should provide good control results. Pos: 25.8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 28: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

28 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 25.9 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Abgleich Temperaturmessung @ 13\mod_1284636694181_15.docx @ 90026 @ 3 @ 1

10.1.5 Adjustment

If the measured temperature is distorted, such as by the inherent heat of the bus coupler, an "Offset room temperature measurement" can be set. If additional external temperature recording has been activated and the measured value becomes distorted through the influence of cold or heat, here, too, an offset can be entered. Pos: 25.10 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Regler @ 13\mod_1284636897353_15.docx @ 90034 @ 2 @ 1

10.2 Controller

The room thermostat can be used exclusively for heating, exclusively for cooling or for heating and cooling. If the room thermostat is to heat or cool, the switchover from heating to cooling or cooling to heating can occur automatically by means of the room thermostat. The controller detects automatically whether a control value for heating or cooling is to be sent out. If the automatic switchover is not required, the switchover between heating and cooling can take place by means of an external, central control via the 1-bit object "Switchover heating/cooling". In this setup, the heat and cooling icons are continuously displayed in the respective mode. The object is enabled via parameter "Switchover between heating/cooling". The control value for heating and/or cooling can be sent out on a common communication object "Heating/cooling control value" or on two individual communication objects "Heating control value" and "Cooling control value". If a common object is used, it may be necessary to inform the actuator whether the control value is for heating or cooling. For this, a 1-bit communication object "Switchover heating/cooling" can be enabled via parameter "Switchover between heating and cooling" with setting "Automatic and sending". For activation of heating operating mode a "1" is sent to the bus, for activation of cooling mode a "0". A common communication object for heating and cooling is required to activate two two-pipe systems, i.e., the same pipeline is used for heating and cooling. Two single communication objects are used for four-pipe systems. Heating and cooling each have their own pipeline system. Parameter "Number of output channels" specifies whether an object ("1 channel (two-pipe system) for heating and cooling") or two objects ("2 channels (four-pipe system) for heating and cooling") are to be displayed. Separate control types can be configured each for heating and cooling. One of the following control types can be selected: • 2-point • PWM • Continuous • Fan coil The individual control types are described in greater detail in the following. Pos: 25.11 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 29: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 29

Pos: 25.12 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Zweipunktregler @ 13\mod_1284639958501_15.docx @ 90042 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.1 2-point controller

A 2-point controller has two output states that alternate in dependence of the actual value. If the actual value is above the parameterised setpoint, control value "0" is sent on the bus. If the actual value is below the parameterised setpoint, control value "1" is sent. A 2-point controller should be used when the control value is to alternate only between the two states ON and OFF, such as an electrothermal valve that is connected to a switch actuator, for example. A 2-point controller can quickly correct control variations in case of large changes in the control variable, but never comes to rest. To avoid rapid oscillations of the output states, the 2-point controllers always have a built-in hysteresis that varies around the setpoint. The hysteresis can have different size parameters. For example, if the setpoint during heating mode is 21 °C and the hysteresis is 1.0 K, the controller switches on when the value falls below 20.5 °C and switches off again when exceeding 21.5 °C. The "Hyteresis" parameter to be set, on the one hand responds to how quickly the heating can heat the room or how quickly the air-conditioning cools the room, and on the other hand to the desired temperature of the people in the room. The hysteresis should not be set too small, otherwise the switching actuator will constantly open and close. The hysteresis should also not be set too large, otherwise the temperature fluctuations in the room will be too large. Pos: 25.13 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Stetigregler @ 13\mod_1284706827607_15.docx @ 90054 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.2 Continuous controller

A continuous controller has a continuously changing control value which can accept values between 0 and 100%. For the KNX this control value signal is converted to a 1-byte value, which means that control value 0% corresponds to value "0" and control value 100% to value "255". Continuous controllers with a 1-byte control value, for example, can be used to activate electromotive actuating drives. They translate the value received directly into the valve position via an installed motor. This results in optimum control. The 1-byte control value of a continuous controller can also be sent to KNX heating actuators which convert the 1-byte signal into a PWM size. This allows electrothermal valves to be activated. Here it is practical to limit the dynamic range since electrothermal valves require time to open and close. This takes place via parameters "Minimum control value" or "Maximum control value". If, for example, a maximum control value of 80% is specified, the control will always automatically send the value 255 when the control value of 204 has been exceeded. To protect the bus from unnecessary loads the change of the control value that is permitted to be sent to the bus can be set. The setting is in percent. The control value sent, unless it has changed, is specified by means of a cycle time. The cycle time selected should not be too small (e.g. every 10 min.). Pos: 25.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 30: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

30 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 25.15 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/PWM-Regler @ 13\mod_1284713045044_15.docx @ 90062 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.3 PWM controller

The PWM controller has the same continuous control as the continuous controller. The difference is that with a PWM controller the 1-byte control value (0...255) is converted into an On/OFF switching relationship (0 and 1). If, for example, a control value of 70% is to be issued, at a pre-set cycle time of 10 minutes the switch-on time will be 7 minutes and the switch-off time 3 minutes. This transfers the advantages of the continuous control (control at the desired setpoint, no overshooting) to drives which are designed only for On/Off switching signals, such as electrothermal drives. To optimise the controlling characteristics of the heating/cooling system, the "PWM control value cycle time" can be set. To set a practical cycle time, the type of heating or cooling as well as the actuating drive used should be taken into consideration. The following recommendations can be used: • Electrothermal actuating drive

To fully open an electrothermal control valve takes approximately 2-3 minutes. That is why a cycle time of less than 15 minutes is not practical.

• Floor heating The time constant of floor heating is rather large. That is why a cycle time of 20 minutes is sufficient.

• Hot water heating Her electrothermal drives are generally used. A cycle time of 15 minutes will produce excellent control results.

• Electro-convector heating Cycle times of between 10 and 15 minutes are recommended, depending on the electric heating system and the spatial circumstances.

Pos: 25.16 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Fan Coil @ 13\mod_1284715124126_15.docx @ 90070 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.4 Fan coil

With the selection of fan coil for "Control types" the control value output takes place in the same way as described under Continuous control. With 'fan coil' there is the additional option of activating fan stages via a 1-byte or three 1-bit communication objects. The added connection of the fan stages heats or cools the room correspondingly faster. Which fan stage is to be active at which control value is specified on a separate tab "Fan coil heating" or "Fan coil cooling". Here it should be ensured that threshold value stage 1 must always be smaller than threshold value stage 2, which in turn must be smaller than threshold value stage 3. Pos: 25.17 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Regelparameter @ 13\mod_1284716229894_15.docx @ 90078 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.5 Control parameter for PWM controller and continuous controller (Fan coil)

For continuous control behaviour and for a switching PWM controller, the preset control parameters can be used via the installation type of the heating or cooling system. If different control parameters are required, they should be set individually via user parameterization. User parameterization should only be used by persons with adequate experience in control technology. The setting "User parameterization" can be used to set the "Proportional range (Xp)" and the "Readjust time (Tn". The proportional range lies below and above the preset setpoint and determines the regulating speed. The readjust time amounts to three times the delay time. The delay time is determined by the reversing tangent of the heating curve of the room. In general, the more inactive the overall system, the larger the parameterization values should be. Pos: 25.18 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 31: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 31

Pos: 25.19 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Zweistufiges Heizen Kühlen @ 13\mod_1284717573439_15.docx @ 90086 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.6 Two-stage heating / cooling

In specific instances such as when using underfloor heating, it may be necessary to install a quick additional stage for the heat control in order to warm up the room rapidly. When the room thermostat is preset to "Additional heating stage active", it has a second heating system with switching control that regulates with the 1-byte values 0% and 100%. The parameters "Distance of the additional stage" and "Hysteresis (one-sided)" enable you to specify when the additional stage switches on and off. For instance, if the setpoint for the additional stage is 18 °C and the hysteresis is 0.5 K (one-sided), the controller switches on at 18 °C and off again at 18.5 °C. The settings for the additional heating stage apply equally to the additional cooling stage, the only difference being that in the case of cooling, when a set temperature has been exceeded, an additional cooling stage is switched on to cool the room faster. Since several actuating drives close (opened de-energised) at a 1-bit value of "1" or a 1-byte value of "255" and open at "0", the mode of the control value can be changed via "Invert control value". Pos: 25.20 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722358805_15.docx @ 90094 @ 2 @ 1

10.3 Set values

The room thermostat can operate with dependent or individual set values. Both versions are explained in greater detail in the following. Pos: 25.21 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Abhängige Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722436946_15.docx @ 90102 @ 3 @ 1

10.3.1 Dependent setpoints

In case of dependent setpoints there are two basic setpoints, one for heating ("Heating setpoint comfort operation" and one for cooling ("Cooling setpoint comfort operation"). The settings "...lowering standby/night mode" or "...raising standby/night mode". This means, for example, when 21 °C has been set for "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and 2 K was specified for "Lower heating setpoint standby", the heating setpoint in standby mode is lowered by 2 K to 19 °C. If 4 K has been specified for "Lower heating setpoint standby", the setpoint for "Heating setpoint for night mode" is 17 °C. The dependence of the setpoints are also maintained after a manual setpoint shift. For example, when the user has effected a setpoint shift of 1 K upward to 22 °C for the parameterized temperature "Heating setpoint comfort mode", this value will be lowered by 2 K to 20 °C when comfort mode is activated. When night mode is called up, the value will be lowered by 4 K, resulting in a setpoint of 18 °C. The user can manually change the parameterized setpoints via the two buttons "Raise temperature" or "Lower temperature". The change between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and Cooling setpoint comfort mode" is made via a long press (approx. 1 sec.) of button "Raise temperature" to heating setpoint and on button "Lower temperature" to cooling setpoint. The two specified setpoints for heating and cooling can also be changed as often as desired via the bus without the ETS. Here a 2-byte temperature value must be sent to the communication object "Base setpoint - control". Depending on whether heating or cooling is currently active, the value is stored as "Heating setpoint comfort mode" or "Cooling setpoint comfort mode". The values received are stored in the memory of the device and are retained in case of bus power failure and subsequent return of bus voltage. This makes it possible to send new base setpoints to the device via a visualization when the use of a room changes, for example. New parameterization is not required. In case of a manual adjustment and dependent setpoints the reference base setpoint is taken into consideration. This is used to specify whether the base setpoint refers to the comfort temperature for heating, cooling or the mid-range temperature between heating and cooling. "Setpoint heating" is the default setting. In regions where the cooling function is more important, it is recommended that you change this parameter to "Setpoint cooling". This makes it easier to set the room thermostat and raise the cooling setpoint (standby temperature cooling and night setback cooling). Pos: 25.22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 32: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

32 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 25.23 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Individuelle Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722653915_15.docx @ 90110 @ 3 @ 1

10.3.2 Individual setpoints

When individual setpoints are used, individual setpoints are defined for each operating mode ("Heating setpoint comfort mode", Heating setpoint standby", "Heating setpoint night mode", "Cooling setpoint standby" and "Cooling setpoint night mode". Different to the dependent setpoints, the individual setpoints are also maintained after a manual setpoint shift. For example, when the user has effected a setpoint shift of the parameterized temperature "Heating setpoint comfort mode" upward or downward, the parameterized value "Heating setpoint standby" will always be called up when standby mode is activated. This means that only the fixed setpoints that are stored will be called up for the individual operating modes. The user can manually change the parameterized setpoints via the two buttons "Raise temperature" or "Lower temperature". The change between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and "Cooling setpoint comfort mode" is made via a long press (approx. 1 sec.) of button "Raise temperature" to heating setpoint and on button "Lower temperature" to cooling setpoint. The specified setpoints can be changed as often as desired via the bus also without the ETS. For this, a 2-byte temperature value must be sent to the corresponding communication object "Setpoint heating comfort", "Setpoint heating standby", Setpoint heating night mode", "Setpoint frost protection", "Setpoint cooling comfort", "Setpoint cooling standby", "Setpoint cooling night mode" or "Setpoint heat protection". The values received are stored in the memory of the device and are retained in case of bus power failure and subsequent return of bus voltage. This makes it possible to send new setpoints to the device via a visualization when the use of a room changes, for example. New parameterization is not required. Pos: 25.24 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Mindestabstand @ 13\mod_1284722752633_15.docx @ 90118 @ 3 @ 1

10.3.3 Minimum distance

The adjustable parameter "Minimum distance between heating and cooling" is active both for the dependent and the individual setpoints. The minimum distance is always between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and "Cooling setpoint comfort mode". It serves as a buffer zone to prevent the the two setpoints from interfering with each other. Example: Individual setpoints has been selected. The "Heating setpoint comfort mode" is 21 °C and the "Cooling setpoint comfort mode" is set on 26 °C. The dead zone between heating and cooling is 3 K. If a heating setpoint is now shifted upwards, the dead zone also shifts upwards. If the shift exceeds a temperature of 23 °C, the "Cooling setpoint comfort mode" will also shift upwards so that a minimum distance of 3 K is always guaranteed between heating and cooling. If a cooling setpoint is shifted downwards, the dead zone also shifts downwards. If the shift exceeds a temperature of 24 °C, the "Heating setpoint comfort mode" will also shift downwards so that a minimum distance is also guaranteed in this case. Pos: 25.25 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 33: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 33

Pos: 25.26 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Fan Coil Allgemein @ 13\mod_1284722830008_15.docx @ 90126 @ 2 @ 1

10.4 Fan coil, general

The ventilation convectors, also called fan convectors or fan coil units, are used for decentralized heating and cooling. They are installed in the room and supplied via a central heating and cooling system. There are two-pipe and four-pipe systems. There are multi-stage ventilators within a fan coil unit that enable fast adjustment to the room temperature to be made according to individual requirements. The fan coil room thermostat with display can activate up to three fan stages either manually or automatically. The fan stages can be activated in three ways: • via 1-bit values,

i.e., a 1-bit communication object "Fan coil stage ... switching" is made available for each fan stage. This required for "normal switch actuators. ((When using KNX switch actuators and fan coil units, the connecting instructions for the fan coil unit are to be observed).

• via 1-byte object as numerical value 0-3, i.e. there is a 1-byte communication object "Fan stage manual 1 byte" which is connected with a corresponding communication object of a fan coil actuator. Here the value 0 = OFF 1 = stage 1 2 = stage 2 3 = stage 3

• via 1-byte object as constant value 0-100%, i.e. there is a 1-byte communication object "Fan stage manual 1 byte" which is connected with a corresponding communication object of a fan coil actuator. During manual stage switchover the stage threshold values that are set on tab heating or cooling are sent out. In heating mode the threshold values for heating, in cooling mode the threshold values for cooling. To ensure that the fan coil unit switches the fan stages, the parameters of the associated fan coil actuator must be set accordingly.

Via parameter "Evaluate fan stage status byte" a 1-byte communication object "Fan coil operating state", which is connected with a corresponding object of a fan coil actuator, can be enabled. This allows the fan coil room thermostat evaluate which fan stage is actually active on the fan coil actuator. The display corresponds to the value of the communication object (0 = OFF, 1 = stage 1, 2 = stage 2, 3 = stage 3). The parameter "Evaluate operation status byte" activates a 1-bit communication object "Receive during operation - actuator monitoring". Cyclical telegrams from the fan coil actuator can be received and evaluated on this object. This allows the room thermostat to check whether the fan coil actuator is still operating and can be activated. If the fan coil actuator has a problem and can no longer send cyclical telegrams, the room thermostat will indicate this on the display with the "Error" symbol. If the error on the fan coil actuator has been rectified and cyclical telegrams can be received, the "Error" on the display is removed and the room thermostat will again function as "Normal". The cycle time setting "In operation" in the fan coil actuator should be selected at least twice as large as the monitoring time in the room thermostat ("Sending cycle time of actuator in sec."). A practical cycle time for the actuator is approximately 60 seconds with a monitoring time of 120 seconds for the room thermostat. To prevent an excessive noise level in hotel rooms during the silent period in the night, a "Stage limitation for night mode" can be set. This means that during night mode only the fan stage that has been set is automatically switched to. All fan stages can be activated again when changing to a different operating mode. Parameter "Stage limitation for night mode" can be used to set a limit to "Stage 2" or "Stage 1" or the ventilation can be completely deactivated. Pos: 25.27 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 34: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

34 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 25.28 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Kompensation @ 13\mod_1284723063462_15.docx @ 90134 @ 2 @ 1

10.5 Compensation

The fan coil room thermostat with display has the two compensation types, summer and winter compensation. Each is explained in greater detail in the following. Pos: 25.29 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Sommerkompensation @ 13\mod_1284723143680_15.docx @ 90142 @ 3 @ 1

10.5.1 Summer compensation

To save energy and to maintain a reasonable temperature difference when entering an air-conditioned building, the room temperature should be adjusted in relation to the external temperature (summer compensation according to DIN 1946). The room temperature is raised by adjusting the "Cooling setpoint comfort mode". Raising the room temperature does not, however, mean that you heat up the room. Rather the adjustment is intended to allow the room temperature without cooling to increase to a specified value. This prevents the cooling system from further reducing the room temperature to 24 °C with an external temperature of 35 °C. However, the activation of summer compensation makes an external temperature sensor necessary that sends its measured value to the KNX for evaluation by the room thermostat with display. The following parameters are available for summer compensation: • "Summer compensation lower outside temperature value" • "Summer compensation upper outside temperature value" • “Summer compensation lower setpoint offset" • “Summer compensation upper setpoint offset" The value of the lower and upper temperature is used to specify from and to which temperature value a setpoint correction is to be made. The lower and upper setpoint offset is used to specify by how many Kelvin the setpoint specified in the parameters or by the user via a manual shift is to be adjusted during summer compensation. Typical values for the summer compensation are: • 20 °C: lower outside temperature value • 32 °C: upper outside temperature value • 0 K: lower setpoint offset • 4 K: upper setpoint offset That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from 20°C to 32°C. Example: In the lower diagram 25 °C has been parameterized for "Cooling setpoint comfort". When the outside temperature rises, the parameterized setpoint is raised starting from an outside temperature of 20 °C flowing from 25 °C to 29 °C. The 29 °C are reached at an outside temperature of 32 °C. After this the setpoint is no longer raised even though the outside temperature rises. Note: When compensation is active, CO is shown on the display of the room thermostat. Pos: 25.30 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 35: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 35

Pos: 25.31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Winterkompensation -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422553153360_15.docx @ 331910 @ 3 @ 1

10.5.2 Winter compensation

To improve comfort and to keep the temperature difference when entering a room with large window areas within comfortable limits, an increase of the room temperature in dependence of the outside temperature should be performed during the winter (winter compensation). The room temperature is raised by adjusting the "Heating setpoint comfort mode". However, similar to summer compensation, winter compensation makes an external temperature sensor necessary that sends its measured value to the KNX for evaluation by the room temperature controller with display. The following parameters are available for winter compensation: • "Winter compensation lower outside temperature value" • "Winter compensation upper outside temperature value", • "Winter compensation lower setpoint offset", • "Winter compensation upper setpoint offset". The value of the lower and upper temperature is used to specify from and up to which temperature value a setpoint correction is to be made. The lower and upper setpoint offset is used to specify by how many Kelvin the setpoint specified in the parameters or by the user via a manual shift is to be adjusted during winter compensation. Typical values for the winter compensation are: • 0°C: lower outside temperature value • 10°C: upper outside temperature value • 4 K: lower setpoint offset • 0 K: upper setpoint offset That means that a flowing setpoint increase from 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature falls from 10°C to 0°C. For example: In the lower diagram 21°C has been parameterized for "Heating setpoint comfort". When the outside temperature falls, the parameterized setpoint is raised starting from an outside temperature of 10°C flowing from 21°C to 25°C. The 25°C are reached at an outside temperature of 0°C. After this the setpoint is no longer raised even though the outside temperature continuous to fall. Note... When compensation is active, "CO" is shown on the display. 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: Winter compensation is not available for this! Pos: 26 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 36: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

36 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FApplikationsbeschreibungen @ 9\mod_1269243903093_15.docx @ 52343 @ 1 @ 1

11 Description of application Pos: 27.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Applikationsbeschreibungen/App. - ohne Raumtemperaturregelung 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 - DIN-A4 -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422555321663_15.docx @ 332003 @ @ 1

(without room temperature control 6351/08-825 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0] -> see separate chapter)

6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]: When using a native ETS application the user does not have all "General functions" (logics) available. This is only the case under PowerTool.

Pos: 27.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schalten, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269245200625_15.docx @ 52356 @ 2 @ 1

11.1 Switching, rocker total Pos: 27.4 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schalten_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Schalten, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269244387750_15.docx @ 52348 @ @ 1

With the "Switch, rocker total" application, an operation of the right or left side of the rocker sends out a switch telegram. The "Switch, rocker total" application differentiates here between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right side. Switching objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schalten, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269245253031_15.docx @ 52360 @ 2 @ 1

11.2 Switching, rocker left/right Pos: 27.6 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schalten_Taste/App. - Schalten, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269420582437_15.docx @ 52553 @ @ 1

With the application "Switching, rocker left/right" a switch telegram is sent when the rocker is actuated and/or released. "Rocker left/right" does not differentiate whether the rocker is actuated on the right or the left side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right and left side of the rocker. The application enables a switching function to be implemented with one side of the rocker and to assign an additional "button-oriented" function to the other side of the rocker. Switching objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.7 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Dimmen, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269422737250_15.docx @ 52683 @ 2 @ 1

11.3 Dimming, rocker total Pos: 27.8 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Dimmen_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Dimmen, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269422368187_15.docx @ 52558 @ @ 1

With the "Dimming, rocker total" application, a rocker has communication objects for switching and for dimming. A distinction is made between short and long button contact. The "Dimming, rocker total" application differentiates between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right side. The "Principle of operation of the rocker for …" parameter allows adjustment of whether the left or right side switches on or off or whether it is dimmed brighter or darker. Dimming objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1 Bit EIS2 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 1 Relative dimming 4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007 C, T

Pos: 27.9 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 37: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 37

Pos: 27.10 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Dimmen, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269423462609_15.docx @ 52694 @ 2 @ 1

11.4 Dimming, rocker left/right Pos: 27.11 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/DimmenTaste (Wippe Links Rechts)App. - Dimmen, Wippe links / rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269423217171_15.docx @ 52689 @ @ 1

With the "Dimming, rocker left/right" application, a rocker switch has communication objects for switching and for dimming. A distinction is made between short (switching) and long (dimming) button contact. The "Dimming, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right and left side of the rocker. The application makes it possible to dim a light via one side of the rocker and to assign an additional "button-orientated" function to the other side. Dimming objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1 Bit EIS2 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 1 Relative dimming 4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007 C, T

Pos: 27.12 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousie, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269423899109_15.docx @ 52704 @ 2 @ 1

11.5 Blind, rocker total Pos: 27.13 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Jal_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Jalousie, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269423548328_15.docx @ 52699 @ @ 1

Via the application "Blind, rocker total", blind movement and/or slat adjustment commands can be sent to connected shutting actuators with a short or long contact of the rocker. A short button contact always triggers a slat adjustment or stop command and a long button contact always triggers a move command. The control always remembers the last action performed on the side of the rocker switch that is assigned with the "Blind, rocker total" application. If a blind was lowered and halted at half height via a short button contact, then a renewed long button contact will raise the blind. Blind objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Adjusting(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, T 0 Adjusting (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1 Move (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, T 1 Move(1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T

Pos: 27.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousie, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269424455828_15.docx @ 52715 @ 2 @ 1

11.6 Blind, rocker left/right Pos: 27.15 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/JalousieTasteApp. - Jalousie, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269424218921_15.docx @ 52710 @ @ 1

Via the application "Blind, rocker left/right", blind movement and/or slat adjustment commands can be sent to connected shutting actuators with short or long actuation of the rocker. A short button contact always triggers a move command and a long button contact always triggers a slat adjustment or stop command. The application "Blind, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker. This facilitates control of a Venetian blind with one side of the rocker and assigning an additional "Rocker, left/right" function to the other side of the rocker. The control always remembers the last action performed on the side of the rocker that is assigned with the "Blind, rocker left/right" application. If a blind was lowered and halted at half height via a long button contact, then a renewed short button contact will raise the blind. Blind objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Adjusting (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, W, T, U 0 Adjusting(1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 1 Moving(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W, T, U 1 Moving(1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.16 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 38: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

38 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.17 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269425035171_15.docx @ 52725 @ 2 @ 1

11.7 Value sender, rocker total Pos: 27.18 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wert Wippe/App. - Wertsender, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269424602000_15.docx @ 52720 @ @ 1

With the "Value sender, rocker total" application, a telegram with the predefined value is sent out at an actuation of the right or left side of the rocker. The "Value sender, rocker total" application differentiates here between whether the rocker is actuated on the left or right side. Value sender objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching value(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value(1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value(1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value(2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching value(2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching value (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching value (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.19 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269425766812_15.docx @ 52735 @ 2 @ 1

11.8 Value sender, rocker left/right Pos: 27.20 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wert Taste/App. - Wertsender, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269425575718_15.docx @ 52730 @ @ 1

With the "Value sender, rocker left/right" application, a telegram with a predefined value is sent out at an actuation or release of the rocker. The "Value sender, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is actuated on the left or right side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right and left side of the rocker. The application enables realising a switching function via one rocker side, while the other rocker side can be assigned with an additional "button-orientated" function. Value sender objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.21 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 39: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 39

Pos: 27.22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, 2 Objekte, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269431015140_15.docx @ 52763 @ 2 @ 1

11.9 Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right Pos: 27.23 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wertsender_2_Objekte_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Wertsender, 2 Objekte, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269428977390_15.docx @ 52758 @ @ 1

With the "Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right" application, two telegrams with predefined values from two different communication objects can be sent out by actuation and/or upon release of the rocker. The application "Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker. For example, the application facilitates the sending out of a switching function and a floating point value with the actuation of one rocker side and assigning an additional "button orientated" function to the other side of the rocker. Value sender objects, 2 objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching (rising flank) (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 1.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T, U 0 Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T, U 1 Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.24 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertdimmsensor, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269431267671_15.docx @ 52773 @ 2 @ 1

11.10 Value dimming sensor, rocker total Pos: 27.25 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wertdimmsensor_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Wertdimmsensor, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269431145656_15.docx @ 52768 @ @ 1

With the application "Value dimming sensor, rocker total", it is possible to send 1-byte telegrams by actuating the rocker. Each actuation of the left or right side of the rocker will increase or reduce a 1-byte value (percent or values from 0 to 255). The 1-byte value can be connected with 1-byte brightness value objects of dimming actuators. This allows a dimming actuator to be dimmed brighter or darker with the rocker via value telegrams. Value dimming sensor objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Value 1 Byte / EIS6/14 / DPT 5.001 /

DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.26 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 40: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

40 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.27 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Lichtszenennebenstelle mit Speicherfunktion @ 9\mod_1269436310937_15.docx @ 52783 @ 2 @ 1

11.11 Light scene extension unit with memory function Pos: 27.28 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Lichtszenennebenstelle_mit_Speicherfunktion/App. - Lichtszenennebenstelle mit Speicherfunktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269435757171_15.docx @ 52778 @ @ 1

Via the application "Light scene extension unit with memory function", a predefined light scene number is called up when the rocker is actuated. The application "Light scene extension unit with memory function" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker. The application facilitates calling up a light scene via a rocker side while the other rocker side can be assigned an additional "button orientated" function. The user has the option to trigger a light scene memory command with a long button contact. Light scene extension unit objects with memory function No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1 Byte EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.29 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Stufenschalter, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269437200187_15.docx @ 52793 @ 2 @ 1

11.12 Step switch, rocker total Pos: 27.30 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/StufenschalterWippeApp. - Stufenschalter, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269436921171_15.docx @ 52788 @ @ 1

The application "Step switch, rocker total" facilitates step-type switching. This means that the user can trigger different switching processes with each new operation of the left or right side of the rocker. Example: First operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 1 on. Second operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 1 off and lamp 2 on. Third operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 2 off and lamp 3 on. Fourth operation (left rocker side) switches lamp 3 off and lamp 2 on. Fifth operation (left rocker side) switches lamp 2 off and lamp 1 on. etc. The application differentiates between whether the left or right side of the rocker was operated. Depending on the setting, one lower or one higher step can be switched to. Up to five switching steps can be activated. Step switch objects, rocker total No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching step 1 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 1 Switching step 2 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 2 Switching step 3 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 3 Switching step 4 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 4 Switching step 5 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T

Pos: 27.31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 41: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 41

Pos: 27.32 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Stufenschalter, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269437464625_15.docx @ 52803 @ 2 @ 1

11.13 Step switch, rocker left/right Pos: 27.33 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/StufenschalterTasteApp. - Stufenschalter, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269437349390_15.docx @ 52798 @ @ 1

The application "Step switch, rocker left/right" facilitates step-type switching. This means that the user can trigger different switching processes with each new operation of the rocker switch. Example: First operation switches lamp 1 on. Second operation switches lamp 1 off and lamp 2 on. Third operation switches lamp 2 off and lamp 3 on. Fourth operation switches lamp 3 off and lamp 1 on. etc. Up to five switching steps can be activated. In each case, the application "Step switch, button oriented" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right or left side of the rocker. The application enables realising switching functions via one rocker side while the other rocker side can be assigned with an additional "button orientated" function. Step switch objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching step 1 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 1 Switching step 2 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 2 Switching step 3 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 3 Switching step 4 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 4 Switching step 5 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T

Pos: 27.34 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mehrfachbetätigung, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269438670421_15.docx @ 52813 @ 2 @ 1

11.14 Multiple operation, rocker left/right Pos: 27.35 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Mehrfachbetätigung_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Mehrfachbetätigung, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269437591625_15.docx @ 52808 @ @ 1

With the "Multiple operation, rocker left/right" application, a differentiation can be made between a single, double, triple, quadruple or quintuple operation of the rocker. Different values can be sent out for every operation: single, double, triple, quadruple, or quintuple. The application "Multiple operation, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker. It is therefore possible to realise a multiple operation via one side of the rocker and assigning a "button-orientated" function to the other side of the rocker. Multiple operation objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T 0 Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T

Page 42: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

42 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Multiple operation objects, rocker left/right, continued No. Object name Data type Flags 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T 1 Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T 2 Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T 3 Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W, T 4 Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W, T

Pos: 27.36 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 43: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 43

Pos: 27.37 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Kurz-Lang-Bedienung, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269440952703_15.docx @ 52823 @ 2 @ 1

11.15 Short/long operation, rocker left/right Pos: 27.38 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Kurz_lang_Bedienung_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Kurz-Lang-Bedienung, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269440785765_15.docx @ 52818 @ @ 1

Via the application "Short/long operation, rocker left/right", different values can be sent out with a short and/or long actuation of the rocker switch. The "Short/long operation, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is actuated on the left or right side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right and left side of the rocker. The application facilitates making two separate functions available on one side of the rocker that can be called up via a short or long button contact and assigning the other side of the rocker switch with an additional "button-orientated" function. Short/long operation objects, rocker left/right No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Adjusting(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, W, T, U 0 Adjusting(1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 1 Moving (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W, T, U 1 Moving (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.39 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/RTR-Betriebsart einstellen @ 9\mod_1269441295921_15.docx @ 52833 @ 2 @ 1

11.16 Setting RTC operation mode Pos: 27.40 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/RTR-Betriebsart/App. - RTR-Betriebsart einstellen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269441072468_15.docx @ 52828 @ @ 1

With the "Setting the RTC operation mode" application, an operation mode switchover for connected room temperature controllers can be carried out via an actuation of a rocker side. Depending on the setting of the "Object type for output" parameter, the application offers either three 1-bit communication objects "Operation mode comfort", "Operation mode night", and "Operation mode frost" or a 1-byte communication object "Operation mode". The selection "1-bit" is used for the control of room temperature controllers that have 1-bit communication objects for operation mode switchover. The "1-byte" selection is used for the control of room temperature controllers that have a 1-byte communication object for operation mode switchover to KNX. In this case, the values mean 0 = Auto 1 = Comfort 2 = Standby 3 = Night 4 = Frost / Heat protection The function can be temporarily blocked via a 1-bit "Enable" communication object. Setting RTC operation mode objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 Operation mode Comfort(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 2 Operation mode Night(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 3 Operation mode Frost(1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 4 Operation mode (1 Byte) 1 Byte / DPT 20.102 C, T

Pos: 27.41 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 44: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

44 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.42 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung CD-Player @ 9\mod_1269500376630_15.docx @ 52849 @ 2 @ 1

11.17 Media control, CD player Pos: 27.43 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Mediensteuerung CD-Player/App. - Mediensteuerung CD-Player - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269499470874_15.docx @ 52844 @ @ 1

A CD player can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control, CD player" application. The symbols for "On/Off", "CD selection", "Player control" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the push-button/rotary control element, the user can access a submenu ("CD selection", "Player control" and "Volume") or can switch directly on or off via a push-button operation. In the submenu "Player control" the symbols for Start, Stop, Forward etc. are shown on the display. By turning the push-button/rotary control element, the user can select the desired function (focus) and trigger it with a push-button operation. The "CD selection" submenu functions in a similar way. If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume. A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not be shown here. Depending on the function, telegrams to the CD player control are sent out on the communication objects for "CD on/off", "CD selection", "CD play", "CD stop", "CD pause", "CD previous track", "CD next track", "CD volume". In addition, the function can be temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object. Hint: The function is practical only if a corresponding additional unit, such as the media box made by Coldwey, for CD player activation is used as receiver of the sent out telegrams. Media control objects, CD player No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 CD On, Off 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 2 CD Selection 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 3 CD Play 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 4 CD Stop 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 5 CD Pause 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 6 CD Previous track 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 7 CD Next track 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 8 CD Volume 4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007 C, T

Pos: 27.44 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 45: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 45

Pos: 27.45 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung Radio @ 9\mod_1269500818782_15.docx @ 52860 @ 2 @ 1

11.18 Media control, radio Pos: 27.46 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/MediensteuerungRadio/App. - Mediensteuerung Radio - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269500514614_15.docx @ 52855 @ @ 1

A radio can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control, radio" application. The symbols for "On/Off", "Radio station selection" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the push-button/rotary control element, the user can access a submenu ("Radio station selection" and "Volume") or can switch directly on or off via a push-button operation. The stations that can be selected are listed in the "Radio station selection" submenu. By turning the push-button/rotary control element, the user can select the desired station (focus) and call it up via a push-button operation. If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume. A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not be shown here. Depending on the function, telegrams for radio control are sent out on the communication objects for "Radio On/Off", "Station selection" and "Radio volume". In addition, the function can be temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object. Hint: The function is practical only if a corresponding actuator (audio actuator) for radio activation is used as receiver for the sent out telegrams. Media control objects, radio No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 0 Radio On, Off 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 0 Station selection 1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 0 Radio volume 4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007 C, T

Pos: 27.47 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 46: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

46 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.48 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung Video-Player @ 9\mod_1269501501586_15.docx @ 52871 @ 2 @ 1

11.19 Media control, video player Pos: 27.49 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/MediensteuerungVideo/App. - Mediensteuerung Video-Player - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269500928769_15.docx @ 52866 @ @ 1

A CD player can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control CD player" application. The symbols for "On/Off", "Player control" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the push-button/rotary control element, the user can access a submenu ("Player control" and "Volume") or can switch directly on or off via a push-button operation. In the submenu "Player control" the symbols for Start, Stop, Forward etc. are shown on the display. By turning the push-button/rotary control element, the user can select the desired function (focus) and trigger it with a push-button operation. If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume. A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not be shown here. Depending on the function, telegrams to the video player control are sent out for "Video on/off", "Video selection", "Video play", "Video stop", "Video pause", "Video rewind", "Video fast-forward", "Video volume". In addition, the function can be temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object. Hint: The function is practical only when a corresponding actuator (video actuator) for video player activation is used as receiver for the sent out telegrams. Media control objects, video player No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T, U 1 Video On, Off 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 2 Video Play 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 3 Video Stop 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 4 Video Pause 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 5 Video Forward (Video Rewind) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 6 Video Rewind (Video Forward) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 7 Video Volume 4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007 C, T

Pos: 27.50 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Kurzzeittimer @ 9\mod_1269501915203_15.docx @ 52882 @ 2 @ 1

11.20 Short-time timer Pos: 27.51 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Kurzzeittimer/App. - Kurzzeittimer - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269501730439_15.docx @ 52877 @ @ 1

Via the alarm or timer function there is the option of triggering an acoustic signal at a specific time or after expiration of an entered time. The "short-time timer" application displays a timer function. There is the option here of triggering an acoustic signal via the internal speaker after expiration of an entered time. The time (up to 12 h 59 min) is set by the user via the push-button/rotary control element. After expiration of the set time, a signal tone is triggered on the unit which can be confirmed via the push-button/rotary control element. The set "Value for timer start" (ON or OFF) is sent out via a 1-bit "Timer status" communication object at timer start. The set "Value for timer expiration" (ON or OFF) is sent out at timer expiration. Short-time timer objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Adjusting (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, W, T, U 0 Adjusting (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 1 Moving (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W, T, U 1 Moving (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U

Pos: 27.52 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 47: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 47

Pos: 27.53 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wochenschaltuhr @ 9\mod_1269504586283_15.docx @ 52893 @ 2 @ 1

11.21 Weekly timer Pos: 27.54 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Wochenschaltuhr/App. - Wochenschaltuhr - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269502016677_15.docx @ 52888 @ @ 1

With the "week timer" it is possible to call up defined switching times that are stored in the unit. Up to four different programs can be called up and edited by the user on the display via the push-button / rotary control element. For the activation of different actuators, the size of the "Value" communication objects can be separately set for every individual program under the "Object type" parameter. Up to four time blocks can be specified for each program. This means that four switching times (control times) to those predefined values are sent out on the associated communication object "Value". For specifying the individual switching times the application uses the system time of the device. The current time can be synchronized in the device settings via the 3-byte "Time" communication object (see unit settings). Weekly timer objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Absence 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (1 bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (1 bit moving) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (1 byte light scene number) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, T 1…4 Value 1 [2…4] (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T

Pos: 27.55 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 48: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

48 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.56 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wecker @ 9\mod_1269505094679_15.docx @ 52904 @ 2 @ 1

11.22 Alarm clock Pos: 27.57 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Wecker/App. - Wecker - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269504649733_15.docx @ 52899 @ @ 1

Alarm times (alarm clock times) can be defined with the "Alarm-clock" application. The times are set by the user with the push-button/rotary control element. When the set time is reached, a signal tone is triggered on the device which can be confirmed via the push-button/rotary control element. When the alarm time has been reached, additional functions can be integrated into the alarm call function via a communication object. In addition, there is the option of sending out an advanced telegram, i.e. a telegram which is triggered before reaching the alarm time. For the activation of different actuators, the size of the "Switching" and "Advanced switching" communication objects is adjustable under the "Object type" parameter. Alarm clock objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Acknowledgement 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 Snooze 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 2 Switching (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 2 Switching (1-bit moving) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, T 2 Switching(1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 2 Switching (scene call-up) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, T 2 Switching(1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 1.010 C, T 2 Switching(2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 2 Switching (relative temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, T 2 Switching (absolute temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced (1-bit moving) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, T 3 Switching, advanced(1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced (scene call-up) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced(1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 3 Switching, advanced(2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced (relative temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, T 3 Switching, advanced (absolute temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, T

Pos: 27.58 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 49: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 49

Pos: 27.59 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Meldungen @ 9\mod_1269505427898_15.docx @ 52915 @ 2 @ 1

11.23 Messages Pos: 27.60 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Meldungen/App. - Meldungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269505283373_15.docx @ 52910 @ @ 1

Messages can be shown on the display and acoustically signaled over the internal loudspeaker. These can be predefined system messages such as "Storage medium was removed" or freely definable messages. A maximum of ten messages (message texts) can be created. The displayed message text is restricted to 48 characters. Every message is assigned a priority (warning level) which determines the display of the message window. Information and alarm messages are indicated by a green bar. Warnings have a red bar and alarm messages appear completely red. One or several active messages are shown in the display as soon as the user calls up the circuit menu. The circuit menu is only shown after all pending messages have been confirmed with "OK". The order in which the messages are issued is adjustable. Should a message become active while a user is operating the device, this will be shown immediately. When the primary function is active, pending messages in the status line are shown by a blinking symbol. Depending on the message priority, a different symbol is used here. If several messages are active, the message symbol with the highest priority is always shown. Message objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Message 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 Acknowledgement 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T

Pos: 27.61 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Text für Titel @ 9\mod_1269507114151_15.docx @ 52976 @ 2 @ 1

11.24 Title text Pos: 27.62 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Text für Titel - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269506694622_15.docx @ 52971 @ @ 1

The text/value display should be provided with a descriptive text that makes sense so that the user can recognise which text is displayed. For example, "Outside temperature", "Wind speed", "Bedroom window open", etc. The descriptive text is shown in the display during scrolling and appears in the top left if the function is selected (focused). Title text objects No. Function Object name Data type Flags 0 Text / Value 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 6.010 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.018 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Bit EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Bit EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 6.010 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.018 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, U 0 Text / Value 1 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W, U

Pos: 27.63 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 50: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

50 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.64 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Gerätesperre @ 9\mod_1269507282299_15.docx @ 52987 @ 2 @ 1

11.25 Unit blockage Pos: 27.65 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Geraetesperre/App. - Gerätesperre - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507196912_15.docx @ 52982 @ @ 1

The operation of the display from the circuit menu, or the call-up of individual functions, can be protected against unauthorised access by means of a PIN. Entering the correct pin allows the device to be operated. If a function is protected by a PIN, a lock symbol is shown on the display in front of the function description. Hint: Only one PIN can be assigned to each unit. If a wrong PIN is entered, there is no limit to the number of times the entry can be repeated. Pos: 27.66 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/RTR-Einstellungen @ 9\mod_1269507439823_15.docx @ 53008 @ 2 @ 1

11.26 RTC settings Pos: 27.67 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/RTR-Einstellungen/App. - RTR-Einstellungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507357936_15.docx @ 53003 @ @ 1

Default settings for the internal room temperature controller can be set with the "RTC settings" application. The room temperature controller can be used for "Heating", "Cooling" as well as for "Heating and Cooling". There is also the option of controlling fan coil actuators. Pos: 27.68 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Sequenzaktoreinstellungen @ 9\mod_1269508040953_15.docx @ 53019 @ 2 @ 1

11.27 Sequence actuator settings Pos: 27.69 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Sequenzaktoreinstellungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507712999_15.docx @ 53014 @ @ 1

With the "Sequence actuator settings" application and the press of the push-button/rotary control element it is possible to consecutively send out multiple telegrams with different values in a predefined sequence via the same object. The representation of a sequence on the display is based on the representation of a scene. In contrast to the "Scene", the "Sequence actuator settings" application has only one communication object on which up to twelve individual values are consecutively sent out in twelve firmly set times. The times can be freely set from 1 s to 12 h. The "Sequence actuator settings" application lends itself to controlling showrooms for example. If sequences are configured, they are listed together with scenes under menu item "Scenes" and can be started from there. Values and delay times are edited under the "Scenes" menu item. Via the "Quick run" function, the brightness values can be started up at an accelerated rate. The delay time then amounts to a constant 3 s from value to value. Sequence actuator settings objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 1 Sequence value (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Sequence value (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1 Sequence value (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 1 Sequence value (1-byte light scene number) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, T 1 Sequence value (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, T 1 Sequence value (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 2 Sequence start-stop 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 3 Sequence status 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T

Pos: 27.70 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 51: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 51

Pos: 27.71 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousieaktor @ 10\mod_1269514191049_15.docx @ 53234 @ 2 @ 1

11.28 Shutting actuator Pos: 27.72 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Jalousieaktor/App. - Jalousieaktor - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513864598_15.docx @ 53229 @ @ 1

With the "Shutting actuator" application the shutting actuator is activated (Flush-type switch actuator 2-gang). It has two 1-bit communication objects "Move" and "Adjust". In addition, the Venetian blind can be moved to a defined position via the 1-byte communication objects "Position" and "Slats position". The behaviour can be adjusted so that no undefined state arises during a bus voltage recovery. There is also the option of additionally activating a 1-bit communication object "Status response". The shutting actuator can send out its current state over this. Shutting actuator objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Move 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W 1 Adjust 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, W 1 Stop 1 Bit / DPT 1.017 C, W 2 Position 1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001 C, W 3 Slats position 1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001 C, W 4 Wind alarm 1 Bit / DPT 1.005 C, W 5 Rain alarm 1 Bit / DPT 1.005 C, W 6 Frost alarm 1 Bit / DPT 1.005 C, W 7 Move status 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, R, T 8 Position state 1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001 C, R, T 9 Slats position status 1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001 C, R, T

Pos: 27.73 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schaltaktorapplikation @ 10\mod_1269514683702_15.docx @ 53245 @ 2 @ 1

11.29 Switch actuator application Pos: 27.74 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/SchaltaktorApp. - Schaltaktorapplikation - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269514450016_15.docx @ 53240 @ @ 1

The flush-type switch actuator is activated with the "Switch actuator application" application. For this the application has a 1-bit communication object "Switch object". Depending on the setting of the "Relay characteristics" parameter, the relay contact is opened or closed after receipt of an ON or OFF telegram. The behaviour can be adjusted so that no undefined state arises after a bus voltage failure and subsequent return of voltage. There is also the option of activating an additional 1-bit communication object "Status response". The switching actuator can send out its current state over this. Whether an ON or an OFF telegram is triggered during a closed or an opened relay contact depends on the setting of the "Relay characteristics" and "Invert status response" parameters. Switch actuator application objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switch object 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 1 Status response signal 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T

Pos: 27.75 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 52: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

52 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.76 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Bewegungsmelder @ 15\mod_1289224598389_15.docx @ 96991 @ 2 @ 1

11.30 Movement detector Pos: 27.77 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/BewegungsmelderApp. - Bewegungsmelder - DIN-A4 @ 19\mod_1321427323663_15.docx @ 109953 @ @ 1

The "Movement detector" application can trigger telegrams on the bus when a movement is detected in the detection range. Telegrams can also be sent on the bus when telegrams are received on the 1-bit communication object "External push-button input". This means that a device can be activated by additional KNX devices as if a movement was detected. The time for sending out a telegram depends especially on the operating mode that has been set. The movement detector has available the operating modes "Message", "Automatic switch-off", "Automatic switch-on" or "Automatic". In the "Message" mode the movement detector is in the position to send telegrams cyclically on the "Start movement" 1-bit communication object. In the "Automatic switch-off" mode the movement detector must be switched on manually via the receipt of an ON telegram on the "External push-button input" object. The device switches off after the set switch-off delay beginning from the most recent detection or manually. In "Automatic switch-on" mode the movement detector switches on automatically when detecting a movement. It switches off at the receipt of an OFF telegram on the "External push-button input" object. Note: The movement detector switches off automatically after 6 hours. In the "Automatic" mode the movement detector switches on automatically when detecting a movement. It switches off after the specified switch-off delay beginning from the most recent detection or through the receipt of an OFF telegram on the "External push-button input" object. When switching off manually the detection of movement is suppressed for the parameterised pause time via the internal sensor. The movement detector can be activated permanently via the "Switchover of external push-button input" 1-bit communication object. The function can, for example, be used during cleaning actions to cause all movement detectors to activate themselves even when no movement was detected. If a movement detector works in an operating mode with switch-off delay, this can be adjusted during operation via a separate communication object. This would allow different switch-off delays to be used for mornings and for evenings. The behaviour can be adjusted after the return of bus voltage so that no undefined state arises after a bus voltage failure and subsequent return of bus voltage. The movement detector can be blocked via an enable object. The movement detector can switch brightness-dependent or brightness-independent. The setting parameters can be used to adjust the threshold value of the light sensor. The brightness switching threshold can also be adjusted via communication objects via the bus.

Page 53: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 53

Movement detector objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Enable 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 Switch-off delay 2 byte / DPT 7.005 C, W, U 2 Extension unit input 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 3 Input actuator status 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 4 Detection independent of brightness 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 5 External brightness 2 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004 C, W, U 6 External brightness threshold 2 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004 C, W, U 7 Internal brightness threshold 1 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004 C, W, U 8 LED output 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 9 Switching movement 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 9 Switching movement 1 byte EIS 5 / DPT 5.001 C, T 9 Switching movement 1 byte EIS 6 / DPT 5.010 C, T 10 Starting movement 1 byte EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 11 Switchover of external push-button input 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 13 External push-button input 1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U

Pos: 27.78 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 54: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

54 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.79 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/LED-Funktion @ 9\mod_1269508367126_15.docx @ 53030 @ 2 @ 1

11.31 LED function Pos: 27.80 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/LedApp. - LED-Funktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508113996_15.docx @ 53025 @ @ 1

With the "LED function" application, the LED of the rocker can be used for orientation lighting, for status indication or for function display. The LED can light up in different colours. The LED can also flash for alarm display and/or scene storage display. LED function objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Status (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 0 Status (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Bit EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, U 1 Day / Night mode (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 2 Proximity (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 3 Alarm (DPT_Alarm) 1 Bit / DPT_Alarm C, W, U 4 Scene storage (DPT_Scene_Control) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, W, U

Pos: 27.81 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Alarmfunktion @ 9\mod_1269508521119_15.docx @ 53071 @ 2 @ 1

11.32 Alarm function Pos: 27.82 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Alarmfunktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508449466_15.docx @ 53056 @ @ 1

If the alarm function is switched active, the LED can be made to flash (1 Hz) during the status or function display via a 1-bit "Alarm" communication object. The LED will flash if an ON telegram is received on a 1-bit "Alarm" communication object. If the object receives an OFF telegram, the LED will no longer flash. The LED always flashes in the same colour and brightness that was specified via the status function or function display. The alarm function could, for example, be used to display a wind alarm to the user to let the user know that no blind operation is possible at that time. An additional application would be the signalling of an open door when the user would like to lower a roller blind. Hint: If the LED is currently serving as an orientation light, it will not flash. This also applies if it is switched to orientation lighting during flashing, i.e. the LED stops flashing immediately. Pos: 27.83 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Speicherfunktion Lichtszenen @ 9\mod_1269508749593_15.docx @ 53082 @ 2 @ 1

11.33 Light scene memory function Pos: 27.84 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/LichtszenenaktorApp. - Speicherfunktion Lichtszenen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508652816_15.docx @ 53077 @ @ 1

If the "Light scene memory function" is switched active, the LED can be made to flash (3 Hz) via a 1-bit communication object "Scene storage" during the status or function display. If a scene storage telegram is received on the 1-byte communication object "Scene storage", the LED will blink for 3 s and then stop blinking automatically. The LED always flashes in the same colour and brightness that is specified via the status function or function display. Hint: If the LED is currently serving as an orientation light, it will not blink. This also applies if orientation illumination is switched to during flashing. Pos: 27.85 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 55: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 55

Pos: 27.86 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Verzögerung @ 9\mod_1269509457458_15.docx @ 53093 @ 2 @ 1

11.34 Delay Pos: 27.87 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/VerzoegerungApp. - Verzögerung - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508848356_15.docx @ 53088 @ @ 1

Telegrams can be received via the "Input" object using the "Delay" application. The telegrams received are sent out on the "Output" object with a set delay time. The object types for "Input" and "Output" can be collectively parameterised for different applications. Delay objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W 0 Input (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W 1 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, T 1 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, T 2 Delay time (2 Byte) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, R, W

Pos: 27.88 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 56: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

56 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.89 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Treppenhauslicht @ 9\mod_1269509802172_15.docx @ 53113 @ 2 @ 1

11.35 Staircase lighting Pos: 27.90 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Treppenhauslicht/App. - Treppenhauslicht - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269509557128_15.docx @ 53098 @ @ 1

With the "Staircase lighting" application, switching telegrams or value telegrams can be provided with a light-on time. Depending on the parameterisation, the application shows different communication objects: – a 1-bit object for input and output If an ON telegram is received via the "Input/Output" object, the light-on time is started immediately. This can be a light-

on time of 00:10 min to 88:45 min, which is adjustable in 0.1 s steps. After expiration of the light-on time, the "Input/Output" object sends an OFF telegram.

– two 1-bit objects for input and output – two 1-byte objects for input and output If a telegram is received via the "Input" object, the light-on time is started immediately and a telegram with the same

value of the telegram received on the input is sent out on the "Output" object. This can be a light-on time of 00:10 min to 88:45 min, which is adjustable in 0.1 s steps. After expiration of the light-on time, the "Output" object sends out an OFF telegram (1-bit) or a telegram with the value "0" (1-byte).

Via two additional communication objects, it is possible to specify the light-on time and the switch-off prewarning time. The 2-byte values received are written to the memory of the device and are retained even after a bus power failure and subsequent return of voltage.

Staircase lighting objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte) 1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W 0 Input_Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 1 Light-on time (2 Byte) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, R, W 2 Switch-off pre-warning 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, R, W 3 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 3 Output (1 Byte) 1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T

Pos: 27.91 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 57: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 57

Pos: 27.92 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Lichtszenenaktor @ 9\mod_1269510610443_15.docx @ 53133 @ 2 @ 1

11.36 Light scene actuator Pos: 27.93 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Lichtszenenaktor/App. - Lichtszenenaktor - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269509871874_15.docx @ 53118 @ @ 1

With the "Light scene actuator" application, it is possible to call up scenes that are stored in the device via the receipt of a scene number on the 1-byte communication object "Scene call-up". A maximum of eight scenes with up to eight actuator objects can be created. For triggering different actuators, the size of the actuator groups communication objects can be set under the "Actuator group type" parameter. The user has the option of saving the scenes himself. A corresponding save telegram must be received for this (see the description of the individual parameters). Light scene actuator objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Light scene call-up (1 Byte) 1 Byte / DPT18.001 C, W, U 1…10 Actuator group A [B…J] (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 1…10 Actuator group A [B…J] (1-bit Venetian blind) 1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008 C, W, T, U 1…10 Actuator group A [B…J] (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 1…10 Actuator group A [B…J] (1-byte light scene number) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, W, T, U 1…10 Actuator group A [B…J] (Temperature value absolute) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, W, T, U 10…19 Enable scene 1 [Scene 2 … Scene 10] 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T

Pos: 27.94 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Sequenz @ 9\mod_1269511034750_15.docx @ 53143 @ 2 @ 1

11.37 Sequence Pos: 27.95 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Sequenz/App. - Sequenz - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269510677004_15.docx @ 53138 @ @ 1

With the "Sequence " application it is possible to send out multiple telegrams with different values in a predefined sequence consecutively over the same object. In contrast to the scene, the "Sequence" application has only one communication object on which up to twelve individual values are consecutively sent in twelve firmly set times. The times can be freely set from 1 s to 12 h. The "Sequence" application lends itself to controlling showrooms for example. The function can be temporarily blocked via an enable object. Sequence objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Sequence value (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T, U 0 Sequence value (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W, T, U 0 Sequence value (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T, U 0 Sequence value (1-byte light scene number) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, W, T, U 0 Sequence value (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W, T, U 0 Sequence value (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W, T, U 1 Sequence start 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 2 Sequence status 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 4 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W

Pos: 27.96 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 58: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

58 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.97 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Preset @ 10\mod_1269511326199_15.docx @ 53153 @ 2 @ 1

11.38 Preset Pos: 27.98 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Preset/App. - Preset - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269511150514_15.docx @ 53148 @ @ 1

The "Preset" application makes an input and output communication object available. At the receipt of a switching telegram on the 1-bit input object, a telegram is immediately sent out on the 1-byte output object. A preset percent value or, alternatively, a light scene number can be sent out. Preset objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 0 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 0 Output (1-byte light scene number) 1 Byte / DPT 18.001 C, T

Pos: 27.99 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Telegramm zyklisch @ 10\mod_1269511714991_15.docx @ 53163 @ 2 @ 1

11.39 Cyclic telegram Pos: 27.100 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Telegramm zyklisch/App. - Telegramm zyklisch - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511411745_15.docx @ 53158 @ @ 1

Via the "Cyclic telegram" application and after receipt of a telegram on the "Input" object, a telegram with the same volume is cyclically sent out on the "Cyclic output" object. The object types for "Input" and "Output" can be collectively parameterised for the different applications. The times for cyclic sending on the "Output" object are adjustable. Via an additional "Enable" object, there is the option of temporarily blocking the function. Cyclic telegram objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 0 Input (1-bit alarm) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W 0 Input (2-byte temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W 1 Output (1-bit switching) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Output (1-bit alarm) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, T 1 Output (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 1 Output (2-byte temperature) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001 C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, T 1 Output (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, T 2 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W

Pos: 27.101 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 59: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 59

Pos: 27.102 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Blinken @ 10\mod_1269511888317_15.docx @ 53173 @ 2 @ 1

11.40 Flashing Pos: 27.103 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Blinken/App. - Blinken - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511782600_15.docx @ 53168 @ @ 1

In order to trigger a flashing sequence on the output object, a telegram must be received on the input object beforehand. The "Flashing" parameter specifies whether the flashing sequence is started with an ON or an OFF telegram on the input object. Alternatively, the flashing sequence can be also be started with a "Change of state", i.e. if the input signal switches from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0". Flashing objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 1 Output 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T

Pos: 27.104 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Logik @ 10\mod_1270535021890_15.docx @ 53458 @ 2 @ 1

11.41 Logic Pos: 27.105 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Logik/App. - Logik - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1270534383703_15.docx @ 53453 @ @ 1

Logic objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, T 0 Output (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, T 1 Input 1 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 1 Input 1 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 2 Input 2 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 2 Input 2 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 3 Input 3 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 3 Input 3 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 4 Input 4 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 4 Input 4 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 5 Input 5 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 5 Input 5 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 6 Input 6 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 6 Input 6 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 7 Input 7 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 7 Input 7 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 8 Input 8 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 8 Input 8 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 9 Input 9 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 9 Input 9 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U 10 Input 10 (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W, U 10 Input 10 (1 Byte) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W, U

Pos: 27.106 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 60: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

60 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.107 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Tor @ 10\mod_1269512122627_15.docx @ 53183 @ 2 @ 1

11.42 Gate Pos: 27.108 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Tor/App. - Tor - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511957207_15.docx @ 53178 @ @ 1

The "Gate" application allows specific signals to be filtered and the signal flow to be temporarily blocked. The function has three communication objects: "Control input", "Input" and "Output". The input or output object can assume different sizes. The bit size can be freely assigned with the "Not assigned" setting. This means that the first internal or external group address/action that is assigned and already connected to some other communication object will specify the size. The control can occur from "Input to output" or also from "Output to input", provided the control input allows this. Enabling via the control input can occur via an ON or an OFF telegram. If, for example, the "Control input" setting is set to "ON telegram", only telegrams from the input are transmitted to the output, if prior to this the control input has received an ON telegram. It is also possible to block signals via the "Filter function" setting. Either "nothing is filtered out" or the signal "ON is filtered out" or the signal "OFF is filtered out". This function is always necessary, for example, when only the ON telegram is interesting for a sensor and the sensor does not offer any filter function in its application program. Gate objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input - C, W, T 1 Output - C, W, T 2 Control input 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W

Pos: 27.109 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 61: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 61

Pos: 27.110 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Min- / Maxwertgeber @ 10\mod_1269512699231_15.docx @ 53194 @ 2 @ 1

11.43 Min/Max value transducer Pos: 27.111 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/MinMaxApp. - Min- / Maxwertgeber - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269512210610_15.docx @ 53189 @ @ 1

Up to eight input values can be compared with each other using the "Min/max value transducer" application. The application can output the highest input value, the smallest input value or the average of all input values on the output. The size of the input objects, and with it also the size of the output object can be adapted for the most diverse applications. You can select from the following object types: – 1-byte 0..100 %, for comparison of percent values – 1-byte 0..255, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 255 – 2-byte float, for the comparison of 2-byte floating point values (physical values such as temperature, brightness value

etc.) – 2-byte signed, for the comparison of decimal values between -32,768 and +32,767 – 2-byte unsigned, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 65,535 – 4-byte float, for the comparison of 4-byte floating point values (physical values such as acceleration, electrical current,

work etc.) – 4-byte signed, for the comparison of decimal values between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647 – 4-byte unsigned, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 4,294,967,295 Hint: With whole numbers the average value is rounded. Min/Max value transducer objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 0 Output (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 0 Output (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, T 0 Output (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, T 0 Output (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, T 0 Output (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, T 0 Output (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, T 0 Output (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, T 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W 1…10 Input 1 (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W 1…10 Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W

Pos: 27.112 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 62: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

62 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 27.113 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schwellwert / Hysterese @ 10\mod_1269513105197_15.docx @ 53204 @ 2 @ 1

11.44 Threshold value / hysteresis Pos: 27.114 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schwellwert / Hysterese/App. - Schwellwert / Hysterese - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269512775480_15.docx @ 53199 @ @ 1

With the "Threshold value / Hysteresis" application, value telegrams can be received on an input communication object and compared with threshold values specified in the device. Predefined values are sent out on the communication "Output" communication object if the upper or lower thresholds are exceeded. The size of the object can be adjusted for different applications. The function can be temporarily blocked via an enable object. If the value of the lower threshold lies above the value for the upper threshold, the function is not executed. Threshold value / hysteresis objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, W 0 Input (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Float) 2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Signed) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001 C, W 0 Input (2 Byte Unsigned) 2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Float) 4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Signed) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001 C, W 0 Input (4 Byte Unsigned) 4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001 C, W 1 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..255) 1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010 C, T 2 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W

Pos: 27.115 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/PWM-Umsetzer @ 10\mod_1269513496522_15.docx @ 53214 @ 2 @ 1

11.45 PWM inverter Pos: 27.116 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/PWM/App. - PWM-Umsetzer - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513222290_15.docx @ 53209 @ @ 1

With the "PWM inverter" application, a 1-byte input signal can be converted to a 1-bit signal or a 1-byte signal via an equivalent pulse-width modulation. This function is required, for instance, if a room temperature controller issues a constant control value that controls a switching heating actuator (for electrothermal actuating drives). The function of the 1-byte sized activation is required if the room temperature controller can only send out constant control values or a constant control value is required for other functions (such as central supply line temperature control). There is the option of activating a force-position. The force-position is used for certain events such as the opening of a window or for moving a heating actuator that is to be activated to a specific position for the dew point alarm. If "Alert" is activated, the additional communication object "Fault" is available. A fault will then occur if the "Input" object has received no further telegram within a certain period of time. Possible reasons for this could be, for example, that the associated room temperature controller fails or that during a cross-line function the telegrams no longer pass the coupler. In this case an ON telegram is sent out on the "Fault" communication object and the "Input" object assumes the "Value for fault". An additional "Enable" object provides the option of temporarily blocking the function. PWM transducer objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Input (1 Byte) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 1 Output (1 Bit) 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 1 Output (1 Byte 0..100 %) 1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001 C, T 2 Enable 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 3 Fault 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T 4 Force-position 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W

Pos: 27.117 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 63: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 63

Pos: 27.118 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Priorität @ 10\mod_1269513770958_15.docx @ 53224 @ 2 @ 1

11.46 Priority Pos: 27.119 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Prioritaet/App. - Priorität - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513570444_15.docx @ 53219 @ @ 1

The "Priority" application has 3 communication objects, a 1-bit object "Switch input", a 2-bit object "Input priority" and a 1-bit object "Output". The telegrams received on the "Switch input" are transferred to the "Output" depending on the state of the "Input priority" object. The 2-bit object "Input priority" can receive and differentiate between four different values (0, 1, 2 and 3). Here, the "Output" object is positively driven. Three different states are differentiated: – "Input priority" has value "3": the value that is present on "Switch input" has no meaning. The "Output" is switched to

positively driven and has the value "1". – "Input priority" has the value "2". The value that is present on "Switch input" has no meaning. The "Output" is switched

off positively driven and has the value "0". – "Input priority" has the value "1" or "0". The "Output" is not positively driven. The "Switch input" is linked to the status bit

of the priority object OR and transferred to the "Output". During a positive drive, changes of the "Switch input" object are saved, even if the current state on the "Output" object does not immediately change through this. If the positive drive is terminated, a telegram transmission on the "Output" occurs according to the current value of the "Switch input" object. Priority objects No. Object name Data type Flags 0 Switch input 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, W 1 Priority input 2 Bit EIS8 / DPT 2.001 C, W 2 Output 1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001 C, T

Pos: 28 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 64: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

64 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 29 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Überschriften (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/1. Ebene/A - F/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen RTR 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422555479069_15.docx @ 332020 @ 1 @ 1

12 Description of applications/parameters for room temperature control 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 [from update version 0.1.6.0

Pos: 30.1 /DinA-4 -- Online/1.1 Überschrift/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen/Applikation „RTR“ @ 41\mod_1422458625557_15.docx @ 329699 @ 2 @ 1

12.1 Application "RTC" Pos: 30.2 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Gerätefunktion @ 40\mod_1421678635501_15.docx @ 312393 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.1 General - Device function

Options: Single device

Master device

Slave device

– Single device: The device is used singly in a room as room temperature controller. – Master device: At least two room temperature controllers are located in one room. One device is to be

set up as a master device, while the others are to be programmed as slave devices / temperature sensors. The master device is to be linked to the slave devices using the appropriately labelled communication objects. The master device regulates the temperature.

– Slave device/temperature sensor: At least two room temperature controllers are located in one room. One device is to be set up as a master device, while the others are to be programmed as slave devices / temperature sensors. The slave devices are to be linked to the master device with the appropriately labelled communication objects. The slave device serves the room temperature control functions of the master.

Pos: 30.3 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Reglerfunktion @ 40\mod_1421678818959_15.docx @ 312408 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.2 General - Control function

Options: Heating

Heating with additional stage

Cooling

Cooling with additional stage

Heating and cooling

Heating and cooling with additional stage

– Heating: For operating a heat-based automatic single-room control. The temperature is regulated to the setpoint value defined in the parameter. The "Controller type" and "Heating type" can be programmed for optimal control.

– Heating with additional stage: In addition to the control function described under heating, the additional stage enables the activation of an additional heating circuit. This type of additional stage is used, for example, to quickly heat up a bathroom with floor heating via a heated towel rack.

– Cooling: For operating a cooling-based automatic single-room control. The temperature is regulated to the setpoint value defined in the parameter. The "Controller type" and "Cooling type" can be programmed for optimal control.

– Cooling with additional stage: In addition to the control function described under cooling, the additional stage enables the activation of an additional cooling device. This type of additional stage is used, for example, to quickly cool a room via an added cooling device.

– Heating and cooling: For operating a two-wire or four-wire system used to heat or cool a room. Switching between heating and cooling takes place using a central switch (two-wire system) or is carried out manually and / or automatically via the single room temperature controller (four-wire system).

Page 65: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 65

– Heating and cooling with an additional stage: In addition to the heating and cooling functions, one additional stage each with an autonomous controller type can be programmed.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.4 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Betriebsmodus nach Reset @ 40\mod_1421679113020_15.docx @ 312423 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.3 General - Operating mode after reset

Options: Comfort

Standby

Eco mode

Cooling with additional stage

Frost/heat protection

After a reset the device will run in the operating mode after a restart until a new operating mode is set as the result of device operation or by communication objects, as the case may be. This operating mode should be defined during the planning phase. An improperly defined operating mode can result in a loss of comfort or increased energy consumption.

– Comfort: If the room temperature is not automatically lowered and the room is therefore controlled independent of its use.

– Standby: If the room is controlled automatically, e.g. by a presence detector, as a function of its use. – Eco mode: If the room is controlled automatically or manually as a function of it use. – Frost/heat protection: If only the building protection function is necessary in the room after a reset.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.5 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Zusätzliche Funktionen @ 40\mod_1421679254855_15.docx @ 312438 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.4 General - Additional functions

Options: No

Yes

– This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. window contact and presence detector.

Pos: 30.6 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 66: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

66 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.7 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Zyklisch „In Betrieb“ senden (min @ 40\mod_1421679379156_15.docx @ 312453 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.5 General - Send cyclic "In operation" (min)

Options: Setting option between 5 - 3000 minutes

– The "In operation" communication object serves to inform that the controller still operates. Value "1" is sent cyclic. This parameter is used to set the cycle for sending. If the cyclic telegram fails, the function of the device is faulty and the air-conditioning of the room can be maintained with a forced operation. However, for this the system and/or actuator must have "Forced operation" function.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Additional function" parameter is set to "Yes".

Pos: 30.8 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen @ 40\mod_1421679527075_15.docx @ 312468 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.6 Heating control

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.9 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421679598913_15.docx @ 312483 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.7 Heating control - Control value type

Options: 2-point 1 bit, Off/On

2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)

PI continuous, 0-100%

PI PWM, On/Off

Fan coil

The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.

– 2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis) and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.

– 2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however, the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).

– PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% - 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.

– PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.

– Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).

Page 67: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 67

Pos: 30.10 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Art der Heizung @ 40\mod_1421679666586_15.docx @ 312498 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.8 Heating control - Heating type

Options: PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:

■ Area (e.g. floor heating) 4°C 200 min

■ Convector (e.g. heater) 1.5°C 100 min

■ Free configuration

Fan coil:

■ Fan coil 4°C 90 min

■ Free configuration

Multiple heating types (panel heating, convector heating or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.

– If the required heating type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.11 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421679772900_15.docx @ 312513 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.9 Heating control - P-component (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 100

The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A P-component from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.12 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 68: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

68 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.13 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421679855627_15.docx @ 312528 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.10 Heating control - I-component (min.)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system, the greater the reset time.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.14 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421679921896_15.docx @ 312543 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.11 Heating control - Extended settings

Options: No

Yes

– This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Basic stage heating".

Pos: 30.15 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421679979210_15.docx @ 312558 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.12 Basic stage heating

Note Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Heating control" is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.16 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Statusobjekt Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680039317_15.docx @ 312573 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.13 Basic stage heating - Status object heating

Options: No

Yes

– This parameter enables the "Status heating" communication object.

Pos: 30.17 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421680138767_15.docx @ 312588 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.14 Basic stage heating - Mode of the control value

Options: Normal

Inverse

The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or de-energised closed (inverse) valves.

– Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed". – Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".

Page 69: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 69

Pos: 30.18 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421680196846_15.docx @ 312603 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.15 Basic stage heating - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 3 - 255

The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".

Pos: 30.19 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680273177_15.docx @ 312618 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.16 Basic stage heating - Control value difference for sending of heating control value

Options: 2 %

5 %

10 %

Send cyclic only

The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation. Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.20 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421680348961_15.docx @ 312633 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.17 Basic stage heating - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes

The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0-100%" or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.21 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 70: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

70 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.22 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — PWM-Zyklus Heizen (min) @ 40\mod_1421680437476_15.docx @ 312648 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.18 Basic stage heating - PWM cycle heating (min)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes

In PI PWM, On/off the control value percentage values are converted into a pulse-interval signal. This means that a selected PWM cycle will be divided into an on-phase and an off-phase based on the control value. Accordingly, a control value output of 33% in a PWM cycle of 15 min. results in an "On-phase" of five minutes and an "Off-phase" of 10 min. The time for a PWM cycle can be specified here.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set on "PI PWM, On/Off“.

Pos: 30.23 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421680487786_15.docx @ 312663 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.19 Basic stage heating - Maximum control value (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a higher control value.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.24 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421680539734_15.docx @ 312678 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.20 Basic stage heating - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating floor heating. Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a heating medium will flow through the floor heating system to prevent the floor from cooling down. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.25 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680662849_15.docx @ 312693 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.21 Control of additional heating stage

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Heating with additional stage" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Page 71: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 71

Pos: 30.26 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421680743735_15.docx @ 312708 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.22 Control of additional heating stage - Control value type

Options: 2-point 1 bit, Off/On

2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)

PI continuous, 0-100%

PI PWM, On/Off

Fan coil

The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.

– 2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis) and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.

– 2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however, the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).

– PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% - 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.

– PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.

– Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).

Pos: 30.27 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 72: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

72 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.28 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Art der Zusatz-Heizung @ 40\mod_1421680844168_15.docx @ 312723 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.23 Control of additional heating stage - Additional heating type

Options: PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:

■ Area (e.g. floor heating) 4°C 200 min

■Convector (e.g. heater) 1.5°C 100 min

■ Free configuration

Fan coil:

■ Fan coil 4°C 90 min

■ Free configuration

Multiple heating types (panel heating, convector heating or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.

– If the required heating type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.29 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421680905289_15.docx @ 312738 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.24 Control of additional heating stage - P-component (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 100

The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A P-component from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Additional heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.30 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 73: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 73

Pos: 30.31 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421681020479_15.docx @ 312753 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.25 Control of additional heating stage - P-component (min)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system, the greater the reset time.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Additional heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.32 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Temperaturdifferenz zur Grundstufe (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681098573_15.docx @ 312768 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.26 Control of additional heating stage - Temperature difference to basic stage (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The setpoint temperature of the additional stage is defined as a function of the current setpoint temperature of the base stage and is expressed as a difference. The value represents the setpoint value starting at which the additional stage will operate.

Pos: 30.33 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421681150380_15.docx @ 312783 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.27 Control of additional heating stage - Extended settings

Options: No

Yes

This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Additional heating stage".

Pos: 30.34 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421681202812_15.docx @ 312798 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.28 Additional heating stage

Note Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Control of additional heating stage" is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.35 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421681255930_15.docx @ 312813 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.29 Additional heating stage - Mode of the control value

Options: Normal

Inverse

The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or de-energised closed (inverse) valves.

– Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed". – Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".

Page 74: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

74 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.36 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681324071_15.docx @ 312828 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.30 Additional heating stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 3 - 255

The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".

Pos: 30.37 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Heizen @ 40\mod_1421681431586_15.docx @ 312843 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.31 Additional heating stage - Control value difference for sending of heating control value

Options: 2 %

5 %

10 %

Send cyclic only

The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation. Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.38 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 75: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 75

Pos: 30.39 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421681495047_15.docx @ 312858 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.32 Additional heating stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes

The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0-100%" or "Fan coil".

Additional heating stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a higher control value.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.40 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421681560021_15.docx @ 312873 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.33 Additional heating stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating floor heating. Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a heating medium will flow through the floor heating system to prevent the floor from cooling down. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.41 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 76: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

76 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.42 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421681625088_15.docx @ 312888 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.34 Cooling control

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.43 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421681679485_15.docx @ 312903 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.35 Cooling control - Control value type

Options: 2-point 1 bit, Off/On

2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)

PI continuous, 0-100%

PI PWM, On/Off

Fan coil

The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.

– 2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis) and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.

– 2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however, the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).

– PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% - 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.

– PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.

– Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).

Pos: 30.44 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 77: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 77

Pos: 30.45 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Art der Kühlung @ 40\mod_1421681777953_15.docx @ 312918 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.36 Cooling control - Cooling type

Options: PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:

■ Area (e.g. cooling ceiling) 5°C 240 min

■ Free configuration

Fan coil:

■ Fan coil 4°C 90 min

■ Free configuration

Two cooling types (area or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.

If the required cooling type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.46 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681863004_15.docx @ 312933 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.37 Cooling control - P-component (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 100

The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A P-component from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.47 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421681956588_15.docx @ 312948 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.38 Cooling control - I-component (min.)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system, the greater the reset time.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Page 78: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

78 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.48 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421682034557_15.docx @ 312963 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.39 Cooling control - Extended settings

Options: No

Yes

This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Basic stage cooling".

Pos: 30.49 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682149404_15.docx @ 312978 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.40 Basic stage cooling

Note Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Cooling control" is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.50 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Statusobjekt Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682228449_15.docx @ 312993 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.41 Basic stage cooling - Status object cooling

Options: No

Yes

This parameter enables the "Status cooling" communication object.

Pos: 30.51 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421682294859_15.docx @ 313008 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.42 Basic stage cooling - Mode of the control value

Options: Normal

Inverse

The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or de-energised closed (inverse) valves.

– Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed". – Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".

Page 79: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 79

Pos: 30.52 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421682384527_15.docx @ 313023 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.43 Basic stage cooling - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 3 - 255

The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".

Basic stage cooling - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value

Options: 2 %

5 %

10 %

Send cyclic only

The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation. Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.53 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421682458300_15.docx @ 313038 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.44 Basic stage cooling - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes

The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0-100%" or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.54 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 80: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

80 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.55 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682149404_15.docx @ 312978 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.45 Basic stage cooling

Note Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Cooling control" is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.56 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421682605860_15.docx @ 313068 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.46 Basic stage cooling - Maximum control value (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a higher control value.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.57 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421682745449_15.docx @ 313083 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.47 Basic stage cooling - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating surface cooling. Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a cooling medium will flow through the cooling area to prevent the floor from heating up. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.58 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 81: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 81

Pos: 30.59 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682843651_15.docx @ 313098 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.48 Control of additional cooling stage

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Cooling with additional stage" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Options: 2-point 1 bit, Off/On

2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)

PI continuous, 0-100%

PI PWM, On/Off

Fan coil

The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.

– 2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis) and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.

– 2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however, the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).

– PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% - 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.

– PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.

– Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).

Pos: 30.60 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 82: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

82 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.61 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Art der Kühlung @ 40\mod_1421682941759_15.docx @ 313113 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.49 Control of additional cooling stage - Cooling type

Options: PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:

■ Area (e.g. cooling ceiling) 5°C 240 min

■ Free configuration

Fan coil:

■ Fan coil 4°C 90 min

■ Free configuration

Two cooling types (area or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.

If the required cooling type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.62 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421683053736_15.docx @ 313128 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.50 Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 100

The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A P-component from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Pos: 30.63 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421683156057_15.docx @ 313143 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.51 Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (min)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the room temperature slowly toward, and to ultimately reaching, the setpoint. Depending on the type of system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system, the greater the reset time.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the "Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".

Page 83: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 83

Pos: 30.64 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421738257220_15.docx @ 313213 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.52 Control of additional cooling stage - Extended settings

Options: No

Yes

This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Additional cooling stage".

Pos: 30.65 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421738438512_15.docx @ 313228 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.53 Additional cooling stage

Note Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Control of additional cooling stage" is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.66 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421738600834_15.docx @ 313243 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.54 Additional cooling stage - Mode of the control value

Options: Normal

Inverse

The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or de-energised closed (inverse) valves.

– Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed". – Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".

Pos: 30.67 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421738707006_15.docx @ 313258 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.55 Additional cooling stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 3 - 255

The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".

Pos: 30.68 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 84: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

84 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.69 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421738932127_15.docx @ 313288 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.56 Additional cooling stage - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value

Options: 2%

5%

10%

The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation. Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.70 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421739480045_15.docx @ 313304 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.57 Additional cooling stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes

The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0-100%" or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.71 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421739553533_15.docx @ 313319 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.58 Additional cooling stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a higher control value.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.72 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 85: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 85

Pos: 30.73 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421739808226_15.docx @ 313334 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.59 Additional cooling stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating surface cooling. Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a cooling medium will flow through the cooling area to prevent the floor from heating up. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.

Note This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.74 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Einstellungen Grundlast @ 40\mod_1421740653600_15.docx @ 313349 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.60 Settings of basic load

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Heating with additional stage", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.75 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Einstellungen Grundlast — Grundlast min. Stellgröße > 0 @ 40\mod_1421740733550_15.docx @ 313364 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.61 Settings of basic load - Minimum control value for basic load > 0

Options: Always active

Activate via object

The function finds application when in the desired area, e.g. with floor heating, the floor is to have a basic warmth. The size of the minimum control value specifies the volume of heating medium that flows through the controlled area, even when the calculation of the control value of the controller would indicate a lower value.

– Always active: Here it is possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched via the "Basic load" object.

– Activate via object: When this parameter is selected, the basic load function, which means the minimum control value with a value higher than zero, can be activated (1) or deactivated (2). If it is activated, then the heating medium will always be fed through the system with at least the minimum control value. If it is deactivated, the control value can be reduced to zero with the controller.

Pos: 30.76 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb @ 40\mod_1421740886633_15.docx @ 313379 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.62 Combined heating and cooling modes

Note Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.77 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 86: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

86 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.78 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421740953651_15.docx @ 313394 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.63 Combined heating and cooling modes - Switchover of heating/cooling

Options: Automatic

Only via object

On-site/via extension unit and via object

This function makes it possible to switch between the heating and cooling mode of the device.

– Automatic: E.g. for four-conductor systems which allow the switchover between heating and cooling at all times. The device switches automatically between heating and cooling and to the associated setpoint. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a transmitting object.

– Only via object: E.g. for two-conductor systems which are operated in heating mode in the winter and cooling mode in the summer. The switchover between heating and cooling and to the associated setpoint is carried out via the corresponding communication object. This function is used when a central switchover of the single room controllers is required. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a receiving object.

– Local/ via extension unit and via object: E.g. for four-conductor systems which allow the switchover between heating and cooling at all times. The switchover between heating and cooling and to the associated setpoint is carried out manually on the device by the user of the room or via the "Switchover heating/cooling" object via the bus. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a transmitting and receiving object.

Pos: 30.79 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Betriebsart nach Reset @ 40\mod_1421741049154_15.docx @ 313409 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.64 Combined heating and cooling modes - Operating mode after reset

Options: Cooling

Heating

After a bus voltage failure, a system reset, or the attachment of a device to the bus coupler, the device starts in the parameterized "Operating mode after reset". The operating mode can be changed when the system is running using the options set under "Switchover heating/cooling".

Pos: 30.80 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Ausgabe Stellgröße Heizen und Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421741108543_15.docx @ 313424 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.65 Combined heating and cooling modes - Heating/cooling control value output

Options: Via 1 object

Via 2 objects

This parameter is used to define whether the control value is transmitted to the climate control actuator using one or two objects. If the climate control actuator has separate control value inputs for heating and cooling, or if separate actuators are used, then the option "Via 2 objects" must be selected. Select the option "Via 1 object" if a single actuator only has one object that receives both the heating and the cooling control values.

Pos: 30.81 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 87: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 87

Pos: 30.82 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Ausgabe Stellgröße Zusatzstufe Heizen und Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421741247539_15.docx @ 313439 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.66 Combined heating and cooling modes - Additional heating/cooling stage control value output

Options: Via 1 object

Via 2 objects

This parameter is used to define whether the control value is transmitted to the climate control actuator using one or two objects. If the climate control actuator has separate control value inputs for heating and cooling, or if separate actuators are used, then the option "Via 2 objects" must be selected. Select the option "Via 1 object" if a single actuator only has one object that receives both the heating and the cooling control values.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.83 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen @ 40\mod_1421741365616_15.docx @ 313454 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.67 Setpoint settings

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.84 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Sollwert Heizen Komfort = Sollwert Kühlen Komfort @ 40\mod_1421741414381_15.docx @ 313469 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.68 Setpoint settings - Setpoint for heating comfort = setpoint for cooling comfort

Options: No

Yes

This parameter is used to configure the manner in which the setpoint adjustment functions.

– Yes: The device has the same setpoint for heating and cooling in the comfort mode. The system switches to heating when the temperature drops below the setpoint minus hysteresis. It switches to cooling when the temperature exceeds the setpoint plus hysteresis. The hysteresis is parameterizable.

– No: The function has two separate setpoints for heating and cooling in the comfort mode. The device will display the currently active setpoint value. Switching between heating and cooling occurs via the "Switchover heating/cooling" parameter setting.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.85 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 88: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

88 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.86 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Hysterese für Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421741480026_15.docx @ 313484 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.69 Setpoint settings - Hysteresis for switchover heating/cooling (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 5 - 100

This parameter specifies the one-sided hysteresis for switching between heating and cooling when "Setpoint heating comfort = Setpoint cooling comfort" is active. If the room temperature exceeds the setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis, the system switches to cooling. If the room temperature falls below the setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis, the system switches to heating.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Setpoint heating comfort = Setpoint cooling comfort" parameter is set on "Yes".

Pos: 30.87 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Heizen und Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741566809_15.docx @ 313499 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.70 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating and cooling comfort (°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 40

Specifies the comfort temperature for heating and cooling when people are present.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.88 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741628522_15.docx @ 313514 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.71 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating comfort (°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 40

Specifies the comfort temperature for heating when people are present.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating" or "Heating with additional stage".

Pos: 30.89 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Absenkung Standby Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741705524_15.docx @ 313529 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.72 Setpoint settings - Reduction for standby heating (°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 40

Specifies the temperature in heating mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the standby icon.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.90 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 89: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 89

Pos: 30.91 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Absenkung Eco Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741763743_15.docx @ 313544 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.73 Setpoint settings - Reduction for ECO heating (°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the temperature in heating mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the eco icon.

Pos: 30.92 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Frostschutz (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741866594_15.docx @ 313559 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.74 Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for frost protection (°C)

Options: Setting option between 5 - 15

Function for protecting the building against the cold. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the frost protection icon. Manual operation is blocked.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.93 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741954266_15.docx @ 313574 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.75 Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for cooling comfort (°C)

Options: Setting option between 10 - 40

Specifies the comfort temperature for cooling when people are present.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling" or "Cooling with additional stage".

Pos: 30.94 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Anhebung Standby Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742032937_15.docx @ 313589 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.76 Setpoint settings - Increase for standby cooling (°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the temperature in cooling mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the standby icon.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.95 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 90: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

90 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.96 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Anhebung Eco Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742457725_15.docx @ 313604 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.77 Setpoint settings - Increase for ECO cooling (°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the temperature in cooling mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the eco icon.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.97 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Hitzeschutz (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742545048_15.docx @ 313619 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.78 Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for heat protection (°C)

Options: Setting option between 27 - 45

Function for protecting the building against heat. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the heat protection icon. Manual operation is blocked.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.98 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Displayanzeige zeigt @ 40\mod_1421742653583_15.docx @ 313634 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.79 Setpoint settings - Display indicates

Options: Current setpoint

Relative setpoint

The display can indicate either the absolute or relative setpoint value.

– Current setpoint: On devices with a display, the setpoint is shown as an absolute temperature, e.g. 21.0°C.

– Relative setpoint: On devices with display, the setpoint is indicated as a relative value, e.g. -5°C .. + 5°C.

Pos: 30.99 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Displayanzeige zeigt @ 40\mod_1421742653583_15.docx @ 313634 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.80 Setpoint settings - Display indicates

Options: Current setpoint

Relative setpoint

The display can indicate either the absolute or relative setpoint value.

– Current setpoint: On devices with a display, the setpoint is shown as an absolute temperature, e.g. 21.0°C.

– Relative setpoint: On devices with display, the setpoint is indicated as a relative value, e.g. -5°C .. + 5°C.

Pos: 30.100 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 91: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 91

Pos: 30.101 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — aktuellen Sollwert senden @ 40\mod_1421742735380_15.docx @ 313649 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.81 Setpoint settings - Send current setpoint

Options: Cyclic and during change

Only for change

The current setpoint value can be sent to the bus either cyclically and after a change, or only after a change.

Pos: 30.102 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — zyklisches Senden der aktuellen Solltemperatur (min) @ 40\mod_1421742783023_15.docx @ 313664 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.82 Setpoint settings - Cyclic sending of the current set-point temperature (min)

Options: Setting option between 5 - 240

This parameter is used to specify the amount of time that will elapse before the current setpoint value is automatically transmitted.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Send current setpoint" is set on "Only during change".

Pos: 30.103 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung @ 40\mod_1421743359507_15.docx @ 313679 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.83 Setpoint adjustment

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.104 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Anhebung beim Heizbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743407728_15.docx @ 313694 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.84 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during heating mode (0 - 15°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

This preset can be used to limit the manual increase during heating.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.105 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Absenkung beim Heizbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743479241_15.docx @ 313709 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.85 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during heating mode (0 - 15°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

This preset can be used to limit the manual decrease during heating.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Page 92: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

92 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.106 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Anhebung beim Kühlbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743538138_15.docx @ 313724 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.86 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during cooling mode (0 - 15°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

This preset can be used to limit the manual increase during cooling.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.107 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Absenkung beim Kühlbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743637040_15.docx @ 313739 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.87 Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during cooling mode (0 - 15°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

This preset can be used to limit the manual decrease during cooling.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.108 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung bei Empfang eines Basissollwertes @ 40\mod_1421743723193_15.docx @ 313754 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.88 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting of the manual adjustment for receipt of a basic setpoint

Options: No

Yes

Activating this parameter will cause the manual adjustment to be deleted and the new setpoint value to be provided when a new value is received via the "Basic setpoint" object.

If the parameter is deactivated, the manual adjustment is added to the new base setpoint value. Example: Previous base setpoint value of 21°C + manual adjustment of 1.5°C = 22.5°C. The object receives a new basic setpoint of 18°C plus the previous manual adjustment of 1.5°C for a total of 19.5°C.

Pos: 30.109 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 93: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 93

Pos: 30.110 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung bei Wechsel des Betriebsmodus @ 40\mod_1421743830811_15.docx @ 313769 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.89 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment for change of operating mode

Options: No

Yes

If the device switches to a new operating mode, the manual adjustment is deleted and the parameterized setpoint temperature for the operating mode plus any change by the base setpoint value object will be applied if this parameter is activated. Example: Comfort temperature of 21°C plus manual adjustment of 1.5°C = 22.5°C. Change to Eco with programmed temperature 17°C. The device regulates the temperature to 17°C, since the manual adjustment is deleted.

If the parameter is deactivated, the manual setpoint adjustment will be added to the temperature in the new operating mode. Example: Comfort temperature of 21°C plus manual adjustment of 1.5°C = 22.5°C. If the system switches to Eco with a parameterized temperature of 17°C, the device regulates the temperature to 18.5°C, since the manual adjustment is added.

Pos: 30.111 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung über Objekt @ 40\mod_1421744043574_15.docx @ 313784 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.90 Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment via object

Options: No

Yes

If this parameter is activated, a separate object can be used to delete the manual adjustment at any time. Example of application: Resetting the manual adjustment on all devices located in a building using a system clock.

Pos: 30.112 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Vorortbedienung dauerhaft speichern @ 40\mod_1421744100048_15.docx @ 313799 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.91 Setpoint adjustment - Permanent storage of on-site operation

Options: No

Yes

If this parameter is activated, the manual settings for setpoint and, where applicable, fan speed level, as well as the value of the "Basic load" object, will be stored in the device and re-activated after a reset. If the device is re-programmed, the stored setpoint values will also be deleted.

Pos: 30.113 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Eingänge der Temperaturerfassung @ 40\mod_1421744675480_15.docx @ 313814 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.92 Temperature reading - Inputs of temperature reading

Options: Internal measurement

External measurement

Weighted measurement

The room temperature can be measured at the device or fed to the device by an object via the bus. In addition, weighted measuring is also available, in which the weighted average of up to three temperature values (1 x internal, 2 x external) is calculated and used as an input value for control.

Pos: 30.114 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 94: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

94 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.115 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Eingänge der gewichteten Temperaturerfassung @ 40\mod_1421744775118_15.docx @ 313829 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.93 Temperature reading - Inputs of weighted temperature reading

Options: Internal and external measurement

2 x external measurement

Internal and 2x external measurement

Specifies the temperature reading inputs for the weighted measurement, in which the calculated weighted average of the inputs is used as an input value for control

Note This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of temperature reading" parameter is set on "Weighted measurement".

Pos: 30.116 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der internen Messung (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421744843727_15.docx @ 313844 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.94 Temperature reading - Weighting of internal measurement (0 to 100%)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the weighting of the internal measurement at a level between 0% and 100%.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature reading" parameter is set on "Internal and external measurement" or "Internal and 2x external measurement".

Pos: 30.117 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der externen Messung (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421744895847_15.docx @ 313859 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.95 Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement (0 to 100%)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the weighting of the external measurement at a level between 0% and 100%.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature reading" parameter is set on "Internal and external measurement","2x external measurement" or "Internal and 2x external measurement".

Pos: 30.118 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der externen Messung 2 (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421745031552_15.docx @ 313874 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.96 Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement 2 (0 to 100%)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

Specifies the weighting of the external measurement 2 at a level between 0% and 100%. When added together with the (0%...100%) weighting of the external measurement, the result must be 100%.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature reading" parameter is set on "2x external measurement" or "Internal and 2x external measurement".

Pos: 30.119 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 95: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 95

Pos: 30.120 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — zyklisches Senden der aktuellen Ist-Temperatur (min) @ 40\mod_1421745118320_15.docx @ 313889 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.97 Temperature reading - Cyclic sending of the actual temperature (min)

Options: Setting option between 5 - 240

The current actual temperature used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.

Pos: 30.121 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Wertdifferenz für das Senden der Ist-Temperatur (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421745172686_15.docx @ 313904 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.98 Temperature reading - Difference of value for sending the actual temperature (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 100

If the change in temperature exceeds the parameterized difference between the measured actual temperature and the previous actual temperature that was sent, the changed value will be transmitted.

Pos: 30.122 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Abgleichwert für interne Temperaturmessung (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421745232216_15.docx @ 313919 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.99 Temperature reading - Adjustment value for internal temperature measurement (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between 1 - 100

Every installation location has different physical conditions (interior or exterior wall, lightweight or solid wall, etc.). In order to use the actual temperature at the installation location as a measured value for the device, a temperature measurement must be performed by an external equalised and / or calibrated thermometer at the installation location. The difference between the actual temperature displayed on the device and the actual temperature determined by the external measurement device must be entered in the parameter field as an "Adjustment value".

Note ■ The calibration measurement should not be carried out immediately after the

device has been installed. The device should first adjust to the ambient temperature before calibration is carried out. The calibration measurement should be repeated shortly before or after the room is occupied.

■ This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of temperature reading" parameter is set on "Internal measurement" or "Weighted measurement".

Pos: 30.123 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Überwachungszeit Temperaturerfassung (0 = keine Überwachung) (min) @ 40\mod_1421745300966_15.docx @ 313934 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.100 Temperature reading - Monitoring time for temperature reading (0 = no monitoring) (min)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 120

If no temperature is read within the parameterized time period, the device switches to error mode. It transmits a telegram to the bus via the "Actual temperature error" object and applies the operating mode and control value for error (0 - 255) settings.

Pos: 30.124 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 96: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

96 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.125 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Betriebsart bei Störung @ 40\mod_1421745421976_15.docx @ 313949 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.101 Temperature reading — Operating mode for fault

Options: Cooling

Heating

In the event of a failure of the actual temperature measurement, the device will no longer be able to independently specify the heating/cooling operating type. As a result, the operating type best suited to protecting the building will be selected.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on "Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.126 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Stellgröße bei Störung (0 - 255) @ 40\mod_1421745501614_15.docx @ 313964 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.102 Temperature reading - Control value for fault (0 - 255)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

In the event of a failure of the actual temperature measurement, the device will no longer be able to independently determine the control value. Therefore, a control value which is suitable for protecting the building will be selected.

Pos: 30.127 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen @ 40\mod_1421745673649_15.docx @ 313979 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.103 Alarm functions

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.128 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Kondenswasseralarm @ 40\mod_1421745740879_15.docx @ 313994 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.104 Alarm functions - Condensate water alarm

Options: No

Yes

If a fan coil is used, condensation may form during operation as a result of excessive cooling and/or humidity. The associated condensate is typically collected in a container. To protect the container against overflowing, and thus prevent potential damage to devices and/or the building, the container alerts the "Condensation alarm" object (receiving only) that the maximum fill level has been exceeded. This causes the controller to switch to a protective mode. This status is indicated by the corresponding icon on devices that have a display. Local operation is blocked. Operation is only possible again after the alarm has been deactivated.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set either on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.129 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 97: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 97

Pos: 30.130 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Taupunktalarm @ 40\mod_1421745829394_15.docx @ 314009 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.105 Alarm functions — Dew point alarm

Options: No

Yes

When refrigerating machines are used, dew may appear on the refrigerant supply lines during operation as a result of excessive cooling and/or humidity. The dew indicator reports the dew formation via the "Dew point alarm" object (receiving only). This causes the controller to switch to a protective mode. This status is indicated by the corresponding icon on devices that have a display. Local operation is blocked. Operation is only possible again after the alarm has been deactivated.

Note This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set either on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.131 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Temperatur Frostalarm HVAC- u. RHCC-Status (°C) @ 40\mod_1421745887146_15.docx @ 314024 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.106 Alarm functions - Frost alarm temperature for HVAC and RHCC status (°C)

Options: Setting option between 0 - 15

The RHCC status and HVAC objects have a frost alarm bit. It the input temperature of the controller drops below the temperature set in this parameter, then the frost alarm bit is set in the status objects. It is reset when the temperature is exceeded.

Pos: 30.132 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Temperatur Hitzealarm RHCC-Status (°C) @ 40\mod_1421745946645_15.docx @ 314039 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.107 Alarm functions - Heat alarm temperature for RHCC status (°C)

Options: Setting option between 25 - 70

The RHCC status object has a heat alarm bit. If the input temperature of the controller exceeds the temperature set in this parameter, then the heat alarm bit is set in the status object. It is reset when the temperature falls below the set temperature.

Pos: 30.133 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen @ 40\mod_1421746005473_15.docx @ 314054 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.108 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set on "Fan coil".

Pos: 30.134 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Anzahl der Lüfterstufen @ 40\mod_1421746070041_15.docx @ 314069 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.109 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels Number of fan speed levels

Options: 3 levels

5 levels

This parameter is used to specify the number of fan speed levels the actuator will use to control the fan of the fan coil.

Page 98: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

98 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.135 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Format der Stufenausgabe @ 40\mod_1421746172066_15.docx @ 314084 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.110 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Format of the level output

Options: 0..5

0..255

1 bit m off n

1 bit m 1 off n

– 0 to 5: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output in the 1-byte format as the counter values 0..3 or 0..5. – 0 to 255: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output as percentage values. Example 5-stage fan: The

level value 1 is output as 20%, and 5 is output as 100%. – 1 Bit m from n: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output using 1-bit objects. The number of objects

available is the same as the number of fan speed levels. For level 2, for example, the 1-bit fan speed level objects 1 and 2 are output as the value 1, while the other fan speed level objects use the value 0.

– 1 Bit 1 from n: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output using 1-bit objects. The number of objects available is the same as the number of fan speed levels. For the level 2, for example, only the 1-bit fan speed level object 2 is output as the value 1. The other fan speed level objects use the value 0.

Pos: 30.136 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Stufenausgabe @ 40\mod_1421746237446_15.docx @ 314099 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.111 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level output

Options: For manual operation and automatic

Only for manual operation

This parameter is used to specify when the output of the fan speed level values will occur: either only when the fan speed levels are manually adjusted or also in automatic mode. This setting depends on the options for the fan coil actuator. If the actuator itself controls the fan speed levels in automatic mode based on a derivative of the control value, than the "Only for manual operation" option must be selected. Otherwise, the other option should be selected.

Pos: 30.137 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Niedrigste manuell einstellbare Stufe @ 40\mod_1421746320532_15.docx @ 314114 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.112 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Lowest manually adjustable level

Options: Level 0

Level 1

This parameter is used to preselect the lowest fan speed level that can be set by an operation performed at the device. When level 0 is selected, the heating/cooling system will not be in operation (fan speed level and valve control 0) as long as the current operating mode and operation type are maintained. To avoid damage to the building, level 0 is deactivated after 18 hours and the device is returned to automatic mode.

Pos: 30.138 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 99: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 99

Pos: 30.139 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Auswertung Stufenstatus @ 40\mod_1421746389750_15.docx @ 314129 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.113 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level status evaluation

Options: No

Yes

The controller obtains the current fan speed level for controlling a fan coil actuator either by calculating it from the table of level values under "Fan coil settings for heating" or "Fan coil settings for cooling", or by receiving feedback from the fan coil actuator. If the "Yes" option is selected, the "Fan coil step status" object is activated for receiving the fan speed level from the fan coil actuator.

Pos: 30.140 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen @ 40\mod_1421746450029_15.docx @ 314144 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.114 Fan coil settings heating

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set on "Fan coil". In addition, the "Control function" parameter must be set on either "Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.141 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — Lüfterstufe 1- 5 bis Stellgröße (0 - 255) Heizen @ 40\mod_1421746567638_15.docx @ 314159 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.115 Fan coil settings for heating - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) heating

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

In this parameter, the control values of the controller are assigned to fan speed levels. This assignment is used if the fan speed levels are transmitted together with the control values.

Note ■ These level settings should be adjusted to match the settings in the fan coil

actuator. ■ Setting the "Control value type" to "Fan coil" in the control parameters is only

useful for one of either the basic stage or the additional stage. Setting the basic and additional stage parameters to fan coil is not useful, since the control of only one fan coil actuator each for heating and cooling is supported.

■ The "Fan speed level 4 - 5 up to control value (0 - 255) heating“ parameters are available only when the "Number of fan speed levels" is set on "5 levels".

Pos: 30.142 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — Lüfterstufenbegrenzung Heizen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746645592_15.docx @ 314174 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.116 Fan coil settings for heating - Fan speed level limit heating for eco mode

Options: No

Yes

This parameter limits the fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.

Pos: 30.143 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 100: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

100 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 30.144 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — max. Lüfterstufe Heizen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746713358_15.docx @ 314189 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.117 Fan coil settings for heating - Maximum speed level heating for eco mode

Options: Setting option between 0 - 5

Specifies the maximum possible fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.

Pos: 30.145 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421746779519_15.docx @ 314204 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.118 Fan coil settings for cooling

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set on "Fan coil". In addition, the "Control function" parameter must be set on either "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".

Pos: 30.146 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — Lüfterstufe 1- 5 bis Stellgröße (0 - 255) Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421746840594_15.docx @ 314219 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.119 Fan coil settings for cooling - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) cooling

Options: Setting option between 0 - 255

In this parameter, the control values of the controller are assigned to fan speed levels. This assignment is used if the fan speed levels are transmitted together with the control values.

Note ■ These level settings should be adjusted to match the settings in the fan coil

actuator. ■ Setting the "Control value type" to "Fan coil" in the control parameters is only

useful for one of either the basic stage or the additional stage. Setting the basic and additional stage parameters to fan coil is not useful, since the control of only one fan coil actuator each for heating and cooling is supported.

■ The "Fan speed level 4 - 5 up to control value (0 - 255) cooling“ parameters are available only when the "Number of fan speed levels" is set on "5 levels".

Pos: 30.147 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — Lüfterstufenbegrenzung Kühlen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746915412_15.docx @ 314234 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.120 Fan coil settings for cooling - Fan speed level limit cooling for eco mode

Options: No

Yes

This parameter limits the fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.

Pos: 30.148 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — max. Lüfterstufe Kühlen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746987219_15.docx @ 314249 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.121 Fan coil settings for cooling - Maximum fan speed level cooling for eco mode

Options: Setting option between 0 - 5

Specifies the maximum possible fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.

Pos: 30.149 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 101: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 101

Pos: 30.150 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation @ 40\mod_1421748510803_15.docx @ 314264 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.122 Summer compensation

Note This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single device" or "Master device".

Pos: 30.151 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Sommerkompensation @ 40\mod_1421751085960_15.docx @ 314339 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.123 Summer compensation - Summer compensation

Options: No

Yes

In order to save energy, and to ensure that the temperature difference occurring during entry and exit of a climate-controlled building stays within comfortable limits, the excessive reduction of room temperature should be prevented during high temperatures in the summer ( Summer compensation according to DIN 1946). The room temperature is increased by adjusting the setpoint temperature for cooling.

Raising the room temperature does not, however, mean that you heat up the room. Rather, the adjustment is intended to allow the room temperature to increase to a certain setpoint without cooling. This, for example, prevents the air-conditioning system from further reducing the room temperature to 24°C with an external temperature of 35°C.

However, activation of the summer compensation requires an outside temperature sensor that transmits its measured value to the bus and can be evaluated by the room temperature controller.

The following parameters are available for summer compensation: ■ "Lower outside temperature value for summer compensation", ■ "Upper outside temperature value for summer compensation", ■ “Lower setpoint offset for summer compensation", ■ “Upper setpoint offset for summer compensation"

Above the "Upper outside temperature value", the minimum setpoint temperature for cooling is the outside temperature minus the "Upper setpoint offset". The outside temperature has no effect on the minimum setpoint temperature for cooling below the "Lower outside temperature value". Between the "Lower" and "Upper outside temperature value", the minimum setpoint temperature for cooling undergoes floating adjustment by the parameterized setpoint temperature equal to the outside temperature minus the "Lower offset" to a value equal to the outside temperature minus the "Upper setpoint offset" as a function of the outside temperature.

Typical values for summer compensation are: ■ 21°C: Lower outside temperature value ■ 32°C: Upper outside temperature value ■ 0 K: Lower setpoint offset ■ 6 K: Upper setpoint offset

This means that a continuous increase of the minimum setpoint value for cooling occurs to a value equal to the outside temperature minus a setpoint offset of 0 to 6 K if the outside temperature increases to 32°C from 21°C.

Page 102: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

102 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

For example:

For an increasing outside temperature, the minimum setpoint value for cooling will be increased starting at an outside temperature of 21°C. The minimum setpoint temperature for cooling is 25.1°C at an outside temperature of 30°C; 25.5°C at an outside temperature of 31°C; 26°C at an outside temperature of 32°C; and 27°C at an outside temperature of 33°C.

Pos: 30.152 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — (untere) Einstiegstemperatur für Sommerkompensation (°C) @ 40\mod_1421751187688_15.docx @ 314354 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.124 Summer compensation - (Lower) Starting temperature for summer compensation (°C)

Options: Setting option between -127 - 127

The parameter defines the lower outside temperature value up to which temperature value the setpoint correction (summer compensation) is performed based on too high an outside temperature.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set to "Yes".

Pos: 30.153 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Offset der Solltemperatur beim Einstieg in die Sommerkompensation (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421748718830_15.docx @ 314294 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.125 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the entry into summer compensation (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between -127 - 127

The parameter is used to define how many degrees Kelvin the setpoint value will be increased by during summer compensation when the lower temperature value is reached.

Typical values for summer compensation are: ■ 20°C: Lower outside temperature value ■ 32°C: Upper outside temperature value ■ 0 K: Lower setpoint offset ■ 4 K: Upper setpoint offset

That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from 20°C to 32°C.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set to "Yes".

Pos: 30.154 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — (obere) Ausstiegstemperatur für Sommerkompensation (°C) @ 40\mod_1421748794070_15.docx @ 314309 @ 3 @ 1

12.1.126 Summer compensation - (Upper) exit temperature for summer compensation (°C)

Options: Setting option between -127 - 127

The parameter defines the upper outside temperature value up to which temperature value the setpoint correction (summer compensation) is performed based on too high an outside temperature.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set to "Yes".

Pos: 30.155 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Offset der Solltemperatur beim Ausstieg aus der Sommerkompensation (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421748869340_15.docx @ 314324 @ 3 @ 1

Page 103: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 103

12.1.127 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the exit from summer compensation (x 0.1°C)

Options: Setting option between -127 - 127

The parameter is used to define how many degrees Kelvin the setpoint value will be increased by during summer compensation when the upper temperature value is reached.

Typical values for summer compensation are: ■ 20°C: Lower outside temperature value ■ 32°C: Upper outside temperature value ■ 0 K: Lower setpoint offset ■ 4 K: Upper setpoint offset

That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from 20°C to 32°C.

Note This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set to "Yes".

Pos: 31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1

Page 104: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

104 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.1 /DinA-4 -- Online/1.1 Überschrift/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen/Kommunikationsobjekte — RTR @ 41\mod_1422464590262_15.docx @ 330520 @ 2 @ 1

12.2 Communication objects - RTC Pos: 32.2 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Stellgröße Heizen @ 41\mod_1422460560200_15.docx @ 329734 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.1 Heating control value

Number Name Object function Data type

1 Heating control value (control value heating/cooling)

Output 1. Switching 2. Percent (0 to

100%)

Description:

1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is controlled by a switching/heating actuator.

2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an electromotive actuating drive.

Pos: 32.3 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Heizen @ 41\mod_1422460646672_15.docx @ 329750 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.2 Additional heating stage

Number Name Object function Data type

2 Additional heating stage (additional heating/cooling stage)

Output 1. Switching 2. Percent (0 to

100%)

Description:

1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is controlled by a switching/heating actuator.

2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an electromotive actuating drive.

Note The additional stage can also be used as a parallel second heating stage. To do this, set the parameter for the temperature difference to the basic stage to 0°C.

Pos: 32.4 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Stellgröße Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422460706343_15.docx @ 329766 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.3 Cooling control value

Number Name Object function Data type

3 Cooling control value Output 1. Switching 2. Percent (0 to

100%)

Description:

1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is controlled by a switching/heating actuator.

2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an electromotive actuating drive.

Pos: 32.5 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 105: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 105

Pos: 32.6 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422460775701_15.docx @ 329782 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.4 Additional cooling stage

Number Name Object function Data type

4 Additional cooling stage Output 1. Switching 2. Percent (0 to

100%)

Description:

1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is controlled by a switching/heating actuator.

2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an electromotive actuating drive.

Note The additional stage can also be used as a parallel second cooling stage. To do this, set the parameter for the temperature difference to the basic stage to 0°C.

Pos: 32.7 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regelung Ein/Aus @ 41\mod_1422460821878_15.docx @ 329798 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.5 Control On/Off

Number Name Object function Data type

5 1. Control On/Off Output Switching

2. Control On/Off (master) Output Switching

3. Control On/Off (slave) Output Switching

If a 0 telegram is received, the controller switches to OFF mode and regulates the temperature to the setpoint value for frost/heat protection. When the controller is switched on again, the remaining operating mode objects are queried in order to determine the new operating mode.

Note About item 2: During active ON/OFF controller function in master/slave mode the ON/OFF (master) control object is to be linked with this object.

About item 3:

During active ON/OFF controller function in master/slave mode the ON/OFF (slave) control object is to be linked with this object.

Page 106: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

106 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.8 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422460874482_15.docx @ 329814 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.6 Actual temperature

Number Name Object function Data type

6 1. Actual temperature Output 2-byte floating point value

2. Actual temperature weighted Output 2-byte floating point value

1. The object outputs the measured (room) temperature, adjusted by the calibration value. 2. The object outputs the temperature value which is calculated from the recording and weighting of

internal and up to two external temperatures.

Note An external temperature measurement for room control may be practical for larger rooms and/or floor heating.

Pos: 32.9 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Externe Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422460928926_15.docx @ 329830 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.7 External actual temperature

Number Name Object function Data type

7 External actual temperature Input 2-byte floating point value

2-byte communication object for reading an external temperature value provided via the KNX bus.

Pos: 32.10 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Externe Ist-Temperatur 2 @ 41\mod_1422460982185_15.docx @ 329846 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.8 External actual temperature 2

Number Name Object function Data type

8 External actual temperature 2

Input 2-byte floating point value

2-byte communication object for reading an additional external temperature value provided via the KNX bus.

Page 107: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 107

Pos: 32.11 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Störung Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422461044836_15.docx @ 329862 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.9 Fault, actual temperature

Number Name Object function Data type

9 1. Fault, actual temperature Output Switching

2. Fault, actual temperature (master)

Output Switching

3. Fault, actual temperature (slave)

Output Switching

If one of the parameterized input temperatures is unavailable to the controller for a period longer than the monitoring time, the controller enters the error mode. The error mode is sent to the bus as the value 1.

Note About item 2: This object must be connected to the "Fault, actual temperature (slave)" object in order to indicate the error mode. About item 3: This object must be connected to the "Fault, actual temperature (slave)" object in order to indicate the error mode.

Pos: 32.12 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lokale Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422461103648_15.docx @ 329878 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.10 Local actual temperature

Number Name Object function Data type

10 Local actual temperature Output Switching

Not visible!

Pos: 32.13 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 108: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

108 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.14 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Aktueller Sollwert @ 41\mod_1422461201961_15.docx @ 329894 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.11 Current setpoint

Number Name Object function Data type

11 Current setpoint Output 2-byte floating point value

The object outputs the current setpoint temperature resulting from the following: the parameterized setpoint temperature of the current operation type and operating mode, the manual setpoint temperature adjustment, a change in the base setpoint temperature via the base setpoint value object. This is purely a transmitting object.

Pos: 32.15 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Betriebsmodus @ 41\mod_1422461261600_15.docx @ 329910 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.12 Operating mode

Number Name Object function Data type

12 1. Operating mode Input / output HVAC mode

2. Operating mode (master) Input / output HVAC mode

3. Operating mode (slave) Input / output HVAC mode

The "Operating mode" object receives, as a 1-byte value, the operating mode that is to be set. Here value 1 means "Comfort", value 2 "Standby", value 3 "Economy" and value 4 "Frost/heat protection".

In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode", "Condensate ware alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).

Note Item 2: If the master/slave mode is the active operating mode, the Operating mode (slave) object must be connected to this object. Item 3: If the master/slave mode is the active operating mode, the operating mode (master) object must be connected to this object.

Pos: 32.16 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 109: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 109

Pos: 32.17 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Betriebsmodus überlagert @ 41\mod_1422461351816_15.docx @ 329926 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.13 Superimposed operating mode

Number Name Object function Data type

13 1. Superimposed operating mode

Input HVAC mode

2. Superimposed operating mode (master/slave)

Input HVAC mode

The "Superimposed operating mode" object receives the operating mode that is to be set as 1-byte value. Here value 0 means "Superimposition inactive", value 1 "Comfort", value 2 "Standby", value 3 "Economy" and value 4 "Frost/heat protection".

In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode", "Condensate ware alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).

Note Item 2: If the master/slave mode is active, the "Superimposed operating mode" object of the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the transmitter.

Pos: 32.18 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fensterkontakt @ 41\mod_1422461410317_15.docx @ 329942 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.14 Window contact

Number Name Object function Data type

14 1. Window contact Input Switching

2. Window contact (master/slave)

Input Switching

The object uses the value 1 to signal an open window to the controller. If no other object with a higher priority is present, then the "Window contact" message causes the controller to be set to the setpoint value for frost/heat protection. In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode", "Condensate water alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).

Note Item 2: If the master/slave mode is active, the "Window contact (master/slave)" object of the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the transmitter.

Pos: 32.19 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 110: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

110 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.20 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Präsenzmelder @ 41\mod_1422461461798_15.docx @ 329958 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.15 Presence detector

Number Name Object function Data type

15 1. Presence detector Input Switching

2. Presence detector (master/slave)

Input Switching

This object transmits the value 1 to the controller to signal that there are people in the room. If not other object with a higher priority is present, then the "Presence detector" causes the controller to be set to the comfort setpoint value. In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode", "Condensate water alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).

Note Item 2: If the master/slave mode is active, the "Presence detector (master/slave)" object of the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the transmitter.

Pos: 32.21 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Heizen @ 41\mod_1422461503076_15.docx @ 329974 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.16 Heating status

Number Name Object function Data type

16 Heating status Output Switching

The room temperature controller sends an ON telegram via the "Heating status" object as soon as it is active in the heating mode. If the controller is in the inactive zone between heating and cooling or is in cooling mode, the room temperature controller transmits an OFF telegram on the "Heating status" object.

Pos: 32.22 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422461557645_15.docx @ 329990 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.17 Cooling status

Number Name Object function Data type

17 Cooling status Output Switching

The room temperature controller sends an ON telegram via the "Cooling status" object as soon as it is active in the cooling mode. If the controller is in the inactive zone between heating and cooling or is in heating mode, the room temperature controller transmits an OFF telegram on the "Cooling status" object.

Pos: 32.23 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 111: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 111

Pos: 32.24 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Grundlast @ 41\mod_1422461616973_15.docx @ 330006 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.18 Basic load

Number Name Object function Data type

16 Basic load Input / output Switching

This object uses the value 1 to activate a parameterized base load, i.e. a minimum control value greater than zero. The value 0 deactivates the base load. When the base load is deactivated, the control value can be lowered all the way to zero if necessary when the setpoint temperature is reached, despite the minimum value set in the parameter.

Note Deactivating the basic load for a floor heating system is always useful in the summer, since it saves heating energy.

Pos: 32.25 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422461683726_15.docx @ 330022 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.19 Switchover heating/cooling

Number Name Object function Data type

17 Switchover heating/cooling Input / output Switching

1. Automatic: If the switchover between heating and cooling is performed automatically by the room temperature controller, then this object is used to provide information on the current heating (0) or cooling (1) status to the KNX bus. It is a transmitting object.

2. Only via object: The switchover between heating and cooling on the room temperature controller occurs solely via this 1-bit communication object. The value (0) activates the heating mode, and the value (1) activates the cooling mode. This is a receiving object.

3. Manual or via object: The switchover between heating and cooling on the room temperature controller occurs by user interaction or via the 1-bit communication object. The information on the respective heating (0) or cooling (1) status is available to the KNX bus. This is a receiving and sending object.

Pos: 32.26 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 112: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

112 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.27 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fancoil manuell @ 41\mod_1422461766907_15.docx @ 330038 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.20 Fan coil manual

Number Name Object function Data type

18 1. Fan coil manual Output Switching

2. Fan coil manual (master) Output Switching

3. Fan coil manual (slave) Output Switching

Using this 1-bit communication object, a fan coil actuator can be placed in manual fan mode or returned to automatic fan mode. In the automatic fan mode of the fan coil actuator, the fan's rotational speed is defined in the fan coil actuator using the control value. In manual fan operation, the user of the room temperature controller can set the fan's rotational speed as needed. This setting will remain active until it is reset. The fan speed level 0 is an exception: to avoid damage to the building, automatic mode is activated again 18 hours after fan speed level 0 is selected.

Note Item 2: If fan coil manual is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil manual (slave) object must be connected to this object. Item 3: If fan coil manual is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil manual (master) object must be connected to this object.

Pos: 32.28 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fancoil Stufe @ 41\mod_1422461829339_15.docx @ 330054 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.21 Fan coil step

Number Name Object function Data type

19 1. Fan coil step Output 2-byte floating point value

2. Fan coil step (master) Output 2-byte floating point value

3. Fan coil step (slave) Output 2-byte floating point value

The fan speed level in the fan coil actuator is selected via the 1-byte communication object. Whether the fan speed level information is transmitted in manual or also in automatic fan speed level mode can be set. The formats that can be selected for the 1-byte communication object are the fan speed level (0..5) or a percentage value (0..100%) which is calculated back to a fan speed level in the fan coil actuator.

Note Item 2: If fan coil step is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil step (slave) object must be connected to this object. Item 3: If fan coil step is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil step (slave) object must be connected to this object.

Pos: 32.29 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 113: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 113

Pos: 32.30 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Fancoil Stufe @ 41\mod_1422461897948_15.docx @ 330070 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.22 Fan coil step status

Number Name Object function Data type

20 Fan coil step status Input / output 2-byte floating point value

Using the "Fan coil step status" object, the room temperature controller receives the current fan speed level of the fan coil actuator.

Pos: 32.31 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 1 @ 41\mod_1422461948945_15.docx @ 330086 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.23 Fan speed level 1

Number Name Object function Data type

21 Fan speed level 1 Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is inactive, the object has a value of (0).

Pos: 32.32 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 2 @ 41\mod_1422462014295_15.docx @ 330102 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.24 Fan speed level 2

Number Name Object function Data type

22 Fan speed level 2 Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is inactive, the object has a value of (0).

Pos: 32.33 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 3 @ 41\mod_1422462083123_15.docx @ 330118 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.25 Fan speed level 3

Number Name Object function Data type

23 Fan speed level 3 Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is inactive, the object has a value of (0).

Pos: 32.34 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 4 @ 41\mod_1422462149439_15.docx @ 330134 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.26 Fan speed level 4

Number Name Object function Data type

24 Fan speed level 4 Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is inactive, the object has a value of (0).

Pos: 32.35 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 114: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

114 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.36 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 5 @ 41\mod_1422462258250_15.docx @ 330150 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.27 Fan speed level 5

Number Name Object function Data type

25 Fan speed level 5 Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is inactive, the object has a value of (0).

Pos: 32.37 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Basissollwert @ 41\mod_1422462307375_15.docx @ 330166 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.28 Basic setpoint

Number Name Object function Data type

26 Basic setpoint Input 2-byte floating point value

This 2-byte communication object can be used to change/adjust the parameterized basic setpoint value via the KNX bus. Parameters can be used to define whether the value received by this object is interpreted as "Setpoint heating comfort", "Setpoint cooling comfort" or an average between heating and cooling comfort.

Pos: 32.38 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Manuelle Sollwerte zurücksetzen @ 41\mod_1422462367202_15.docx @ 330182 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.29 Resetting manual setpoints

Number Name Object function Data type

27 Resetting manual setpoints Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to reset the manual setpoint adjustment that was set on the device.

Pos: 32.39 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Taupunktalarm @ 41\mod_1422462410945_15.docx @ 330198 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.30 Dew point alarm

Number Name Object function Data type

28 Dew point alarm Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to place the controller in the dew point alarm mode. This causes the current setpoint value to be set to the heat protection setpoint value in order to keep the structure from being damaged by dew.

Note This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in place until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual operation of the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a corresponding icon on the control unit.

Pos: 32.40 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 115: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 115

Pos: 32.41 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Kondenswasseralarm @ 41\mod_1422462477605_15.docx @ 330214 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.31 Condensate water alarm

Number Name Object function Data type

29 1. Condensate water alarm Input Switching

2. Condensate water alarm (master/slave)

Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to place the controller in the condensation alarm mode. This causes the current setpoint value to be set to the heat protection setpoint value in order to keep the structure from being damaged by an overflowing condensation container.

Note Item 1: This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in place until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual operation of the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a corresponding icon on the device. Item 2: ■ This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in

place until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual operation of the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a corresponding icon on the device.

■ When the master/slave mode is active, the condensate water alarm (master/slave) objects must be connected to the alarm transmitter.

Pos: 32.42 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Außentemperatur für Sommerkompensation @ 41\mod_1422462544140_15.docx @ 330230 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.32 Outside temperature for summer compensation

Number Name Object function Data type

30 Outside temperature for summer compensation

Input 2-byte floating point value

In order to save energy, and to ensure that the temperature difference occurring during entry and exit of a climate-controlled building stays within comfortable limits, the reduction of room temperature by cooling devices should be limited as a function of the outside temperature (summer compensation). This, for example, prevents the air-conditioning system from further reducing the room temperature to 24°C with an outside temperature of 35°C.

This function can only be used with an outside temperature sensor. This 2-byte communication object must then be used to provide the controller with the current outside temperature.

Pos: 32.43 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 116: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

116 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.44 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation aktiv @ 41\mod_1422462598038_15.docx @ 330246 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.33 Summer compensation active

Number Name Object function Data type

31 Summer compensation active Output Switching

This 1-bit communication object is used to indicate via the bus whether the summer compensation is active (1) or inactive (0). If it is active, the setpoint value configured for the cooling mode is increased by the summer compensation function. A decrease of the cooling mode setpoint temperature below the value calculated by the parameterized summer compensation function is not possible. An increase of the setpoint temperature for the cooling mode is always possible.

Pos: 32.45 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert erreicht @ 41\mod_1422462658832_15.docx @ 330262 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.34 Setpoint reached

Number Name Object function Data type

32 Setpoint reached Output Switching

When the setpoint set on the device in comfort mode has been reached it is sent by means of value (1) as information to the KNX bus via the 1-bit communication object. The function is started by activating the comfort or presence mode. If the reaching of the setpoint temperature is interfered with by the preselection of a different operating mode or by adjustment to a new setpoint, value (0) is sent.

Pos: 32.46 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fahrenheit @ 41\mod_1422462709283_15.docx @ 330278 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.35 Fahrenheit

Number Name Object function Data type

33 1. Fahrenheit Input / output Switching

2. Fahrenheit (master) Input / output Switching

3. Fahrenheit (slave) Input / output Switching

The temperature indication on the display can be changed from Celsius (°C) to Fahrenheit (°F). The conversion from Celsius to Fahrenheit always takes place in the display unit, since only Celsius values are sent over the KNX bus. The value (0) results in a temperature indication in Celsius, while the value (1) results in Fahrenheit.

Note Item 2: If the Fahrenheit object is active in the master/slave mode, the Fahrenheit (slave) object must be connected to this object. Item 3: If the Fahrenheit object is active in the master/slave mode, the Fahrenheit (master) object must be connected to this object.

Pos: 32.47 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 117: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 117

Pos: 32.48 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Displayhinterleuchtung @ 41\mod_1422462794539_15.docx @ 330294 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.36 Display backlighting

Number Name Object function Data type

34 Display backlighting Input / output Switching

The display backlighting is activated with value (1) and deactivated with value (0) via the 1-bit communication object.

Note This function is mainly used in rooms where backlighting during the night is considered to be a disturbing factor, such as in hotel rooms and bedrooms.

Pos: 32.49 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Ein/Aus Anforderung @ 41\mod_1422462841667_15.docx @ 330310 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.37 On/Off request

Number Name Object function Data type

35 1. On/off request (master) Input Switching

2. On/off request (slave) Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.50 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwertanzeige @ 41\mod_1422462896751_15.docx @ 330326 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.38 Setpoint display

Number Name Object function Data type

36 1. Setpoint display (master) Input / output 2-byte floating point value

2. Setpoint display (slave) Input / output 2-byte floating point value

This 2-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.51 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert anfordern @ 41\mod_1422462975017_15.docx @ 330342 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.39 Request setpoint

Number Name Object function Data type

37 1. Request setpoint (master) Input Percent (0..100%)

2. Request setpoint (slave) Input Percent (0..100%)

This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.52 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert bestätigen @ 41\mod_1422463038385_15.docx @ 330358 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.40 Confirm setpoint

Number Name Object function Data type

38 1. Confirm setpoint (master) Input / output Percent (0..100%)

2. Confirm setpoint (slave) Input / output Percent (0..100%)

This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Page 118: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

118 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Pos: 32.53 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Heizen/Kühlen Anforderung @ 41\mod_1422463103267_15.docx @ 330374 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.41 Heating/cooling request

Number Name Object function Data type

39 1. Heating/cooling request (master)

Input Switching

2. Heating/cooling request (slave)

Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.54 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe man. anfordern @ 41\mod_1422463169645_15.docx @ 330390 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.42 Request fan speed level manual

Number Name Object function Data type

40 1. Request fan speed level manual (master)

Input Switching

2. Request fan speed level manual (slave)

Input Switching

This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.55 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe anfordern @ 41\mod_1422463241890_15.docx @ 330406 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.43 Request fan speed level

Number Name Object function Data type

41 1. Request fan speed level (master)

Input Percent (0..100%)

2. Request fan speed level (slave)

Input Percent (0..100%)

This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.56 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe bestätigen @ 41\mod_1422463290126_15.docx @ 330422 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.44 Confirm fan speed level

Number Name Object function Data type

42 1. Confirm fan speed level (master)

Input / output Percent (0..100%)

2. Confirm fan speed level (slave)

Input / output Percent (0..100%)

This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.

Pos: 32.57 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1

Page 119: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 119

Pos: 32.58 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regler-Status RHCC @ 41\mod_1422463365069_15.docx @ 330438 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.45 Controller status RHCC

Number Name Object function Data type

43 Controller status RHCC Output 2-byte floating point value

This communication object outputs the heating/cooling operation type, active/inactive operation, the frost and heat alarm, and the error (actual temperature reading failure) in accordance with the specification for the RHCC (Room Heating Cooling Controller) status.

Pos: 32.59 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regler-Status HVAC @ 41\mod_1422463419311_15.docx @ 330454 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.46 Controller status HVAC

Number Name Object function Data type

44 1. Controller status HVAC Output Percent (0..100%)

2. Controller status HVAC (master)

Output Percent (0..100%)

3. Controller status HVAC (slave)

Output Percent (0..100%)

This communication object outputs the current operating mode, the heating/cooling mode, active/inactive mode, the frost alarm and the dew point alarm in accordance with the specification for the HVAC (Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning) status.

Note Item 2: If the master/slave mode is active, the HVAC status (slave) object must be connected to this object. Item 3: If the master/slave mode is active, the HVAC status (master) object must be connected to this object.

Pos: 32.60 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/In Betrieb @ 41\mod_1422463489964_15.docx @ 330470 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.47 Commissioned

Number Name Object function Data type

45 Commissioned Output Switching

The controller uses this 1-bit communication object to send a cyclical "sign of life". This signal can be used to monitor the device, e.g. by means of a visualisation.

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Content ===

Page 120: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn®

120 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual

Page 121: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 121

Page 122: 1473-1-8687 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... · 1473-1-8687 │ │ 29.01.2015 KNX Technical Reference Manual ... 9 Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500

Contact us

1473

-1-8

687

|

| 2

9.01

.201

5

Pos: 34 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/RückseitenRückseite - BJE-Variante @ 32\mod_1357201421897_15.docx @ 262132 @ @ 1

A member of the ABB Group Busch-Jaeger Elektro GmbH PO box 58505 Lüdenscheid Freisenbergstraße 2 58513 Lüdenscheid Germany www.BUSCH-JAEGER.de [email protected] Central sales service: Phone: +49 (0) 2351 956-1600 Fax: +49 (0) 2351 956-1700

Notice We reserve the right to at all times make technical changes as well as changes to the contents of this document without prior notice. The detailed specifications agreed to at the time of ordering apply to all orders. ABB accepts no responsibility for possible errors or incompleteness in this document. We reserve all rights to this document and the topics and illustrations contained therein. The document and its contents, or extracts thereof, must not be reproduced, transmitted or reused by third parties without prior written consent by ABB. Copyright© 2015 Busch-Jaeger Elektro GmbH All rights reserved

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Backcover ===